Quarterlytics / Energy / Oil & Gas Midstream / Teekay LNG Partners L.P.

Teekay LNG Partners L.P.

tgp · LSE Energy
Claim this profile
Ticker tgp
Exchange LSE
Sector Energy
Industry Oil & Gas Midstream
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2024 Annual Report · Teekay LNG Partners L.P.
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
2024
Annual 
Report
Enabling the world’s 
energy transition

2
www.tekmargroup.com
3
www.tekmargroup.com
Contents
Strategic Report		
	
	
6
Chairmans Statement	
	
8
CEO Review	
	
	
	
10
Group Financial Review 	
	
14
Strategic Review	
	
	
22
S172 Statement		
	
	
26
Market Review	 	
	
	
30
Our Business Model	 	
	
36
Our Business Model in Action	
38
Key Performance Indicators	
42
Sustainability Report	 	
	
44
Get to Know Tekmar’s CEO		
64
Vision, Mission and Values	 	
68
Governance 	
	
	
	
70
Message from the Chairman	
70
Corporate Governance Statement 	
71
The Board		
	
	
	
77
Key Management	
	
	
81
Investment Case	
	
	
84
Risk Management	
	
	
88
Audit Committee Report	
	
93
Remuneration Committee Report 	
95
Nomination Committee Report 	 99
Directors’ Report	
	
        100
Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities		
	
        104
Independent Report of the Auditors   105
Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income	
       119
Consolidated Balance Sheet      121
Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Equity	
	
       123
Notes to the Financial Statements    125
Cautionary note and disclaimer 
Forward-looking statements. This Annual Report contains certain 
forward-looking statements with respect to the operations, strategy, 
performance, financial condition and growth opportunities of the Group. 
By their nature, these statements involve uncertainty and are based on 
assumptions and involve risks, uncertainties and other factors that 
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from 
those anticipated. The forward-looking statements reflect knowledge 
and information available at the date of preparation of this Annual 
Report and, other than in accordance with its legal and regulatory 
obligations, the Company undertakes no obligation to update these 
forward-looking statements. Nothing in this Annual Report should be 
construed as a profit forecast.  
Non-GAAP measures and why we use them. Throughout this report we 
present underlying reports and measures. These underlying measures 
allow stakeholders to better compare the performance of the Group 
between current and prior periods by removing the impact of one-off 
or non-operational items. Exceptional items are explained in the Notes 
to the accounts and a reconciliation of GAAP to non-GAAP measures is 
also included within the report

4
5
www.tekmargroup.com
Headlines
Financial Headlines
The Group’s financial performance is improving with FY24 in-line with market expectations for the Period: 
•	 Adjusted EBITDA of £1.7m (FY23: £0.6m) on revenue of £33m (FY23: £36m), in-line with market 
expectations highlighting the successful execution of the Group’s profit improvement plan. 
•	 Gross profit of £10.5m (FY23: £8.3m) representing a materially improved gross profit margin of 32.1%, 
(FY23: 23.3%) as remaining low margin backlog from previous years has been worked through in the 
offshore energy division.
•	 Operating loss reduced from £7.9m to £3.8m in the year, mainly reflects the profit improvement plan. 
FY24 includes an impairment charge of £1.5m, a provision of £0.5m in respect of an aged debt balance 
and £0.7m provision in respect of warranty claims. The prior year includes a £4.7m impairment charge.
•	 The Group held £4.6m of cash as at 30 September 2024 with net debt (gross cash less banking facilities) 
of £1.6m. This cash position excludes the SCF Capital Partners £18m convertible loan note facility which 
remains undrawn and available to drive growth through acquisitions.  
•	 During the year, the Group completed the divestment of its subsidiary Subsea Innovation Limited (“SIL”) 
for a total cash consideration to the Group of £1.9m. This divestment aligns with Tekmar’s strategy 
to drive profitable growth and improve its financial performance. As at the year end £0.2m cash was 
received with £1.7m being deferred.
•	 Order book as at the end of January 2025 of £16.4m and net debt of £0.4m. 
Strategic Headlines
Strategic plan in place to achieve a step-change in scale and transformation  
•	 Refreshed three-year strategy in-place under new CEO, Richard Turner, who was appointed in September 
2024. The plan focuses on achieving greater scale through accelerated profitable organic growth and 
complementary M&A.  
•	 Robust M&A pipeline developed and the Board is actively assessing M&A opportunities. 
•	 Warranty claims in relation to alleged CPS defects have progressed. The Group has recognised a net 
charge of £0.7m in FY24 from a £5.8m provision which is largely offset by insurance monies received 
post year end of £5.2m. 

P. 
6
P. 
7
www.tekmargroup.com
6
www.tekmargroup.com
7
www.tekmargroup.com
Strategic Report
The Board has developed a strategic plan that builds on 
Tekmar’s strong foundations and positions us to capitalise 
on significant opportunities within the offshore wind and 
broader energy sectors. 
Project Aurora, our three-year roadmap, aims 
to drive sustainable growth, strengthen our 
market leadership, and deliver significant 
value to stakeholders. We will achieve this 
through: 
•	 Leveraging our proven track record and 
extensive experience. 
•	 Expanding and enhancing our value 
proposition across key markets. 
•	 Driving innovation through dynamic 
product development and digital 
solutions. 
•	 Disciplined investment in technology, 
people, and capabilities. 
•	 Maximising profitability through 
operational gearing. 
•	 Maintaining financial stability and 
achieving sustainable, high-quality 
growth. 
•	 Committing to ESG principles and 
delivering sustainable shareholder 
returns. 
This strategy is supported by three core 
pillars: 
1.	 Organic Growth: Doubling organic 
revenue by expanding market reach, 
cross-pollinating product lines, and 
enhancing engineering services. 
2.	 Business Improvement: Driving 
profitability and achieving mid-to-high 
teens EBITDA margins. 
3.	 Mergers and Acquisitions: Accelerating 
growth through strategic acquisitions, 
supported by £18m in capital through 
the Convertible Loan Note (CLN). 
The launch of Project Aurora marks a new 
chapter for Tekmar, delivering operational 
excellence, 
innovation, 
and 
market 
diversification while driving long-term value 
for all stakeholders.
Strategic Report contents: 
Chairmans statement	
	
	
8 
CEO Review	
	
	
	
	
10 
Group Financial Review	
	
	
14 
Strategic Review	
	
	
	
22 
Market Review	 	
	
	
	
30 
Our Business Model	 	
	
	
36 
Our Business Model in Action	
	
38 
Key Performance Indicators	
	
42
Sustainability Report	 	
	
	
44
Risk Management	
	
	
	
88

P. 
8
www.tekmargroup.com
8
www.tekmargroup.com
9
www.tekmargroup.com
I joined the Board in April 2023, initially as 
Non-Executive Director and was appointed 
Chair in June 2024.  
The period of time with which I have been 
involved with Tekmar has strengthened 
my conviction about the opportunity we 
have to make Tekmar a stand-out offshore 
energy business – a business that delivers 
exceptional value for customers and creates 
significant value for shareholders. This is 
what drives us as a Board. We start from a 
position of unmatched experience in the 
offshore wind market and a reputation 
across the broader industry for engineering 
and technical excellence. Our growth strategy 
builds on these strengths to create a business 
of much greater scale, through both organic 
growth and M&A. 2025 is where we underpin 
the foundations of this growth to support 
sustained and profitable growth in the years 
to follow. 
2024 was a year of stabilisation for the 
business and for the industry more widely. 
The financial results for the year reflect this, 
with Adjusted EBITDA of £1.7m on revenue of 
£32.8m. Both divisions were profitable at the 
Adjusted EBITDA level such that the Group 
overall delivered its highest level of Adjusted 
EBITDA since FY20. This was achieved 
through disciplined execution of projects 
supporting higher gross margin.  
Going 
forward, 
we 
are 
focused 
on 
fundamentally transforming the financial 
strength of the business through organic 
growth complemented by meaningful M&A.  
Richard Turner was appointed as CEO In 
September 2024 and has set the strategic 
plan to build this value. Richard has been 
involved in the energy industry for over 15 
years and brings a strong track record in 
driving true scale and transformation in his 
previous leadership roles.   
Our organic growth plan aims to deliver record 
financial performance for the Group through 
outperforming an improving and growing 
market and benefitting from our operational 
leverage.  
Our M&A strategy is based on accelerating 
scale and strengthening our offering through 
a logical broadening of the portfolio. Overall, 
the successful execution of our strategy will 
build an exceptional and profitable platform 
with the attributes that investors value. 
One of our primary responsibilities as a Board 
is to support and challenge Richard and 
the team to deliver from here - to scale the 
business effectively and to accelerate growth, 
whilst critically making Tekmar a durable 
business that will be successful “no matter 
what” the path of energy transition looks like. 
As we execute on these plans, we are fortunate 
to draw on the experience, relationships and 
insights of our Board. It is a marker of our 
ambition that in 2024 we were able to secure 
the appointments of Lars Bondo Krogsgaard 
and David Kemp as Non-Executive Directors. 
Both 
bring 
complementary 
and 
highly 
relevant experience gained at large, global 
organisations. That they chose to join Tekmar 
highlights the scale of the opportunity we 
have, and we look ahead with confidence 
and renewed purpose as we unlock the true 
potential of Tekmar. 
During the year, and in light of the appointments 
of Lars and David, Ian Ritchey and Julian Brown 
stepped down from their roles on the Tekmar 
Board. Julian had been a member of the Board 
since the IPO in 2018, and Ian joined the Board 
in 2021. 
In February 2025, Alasdair MacDonald stepped 
down from his position as Director of the Group. 
Alasdair had been on the Board of Tekmar for 
over a decade, both as Chairman and CEO. 
On behalf of the Board, I would like to reiterate 
our thanks to Alasdair, Ian and Julian for 
their contributions to Tekmar over their 
respective periods, which included supporting 
the business to navigate the market-wide 
challenges of recent years.
A final comment on our people. Tekmar is 
dependent on the capability and commitment 
of its employees. We are fortunate that our 
colleagues bring unrivalled experience and 
expertise to address what can often be complex 
customer requirements. They demonstrate 
their commitment to Tekmar on a daily basis 
and this translates to long-standing service to 
the business and underpins our pedigree of 
engineering excellence.  
This commitment to Tekmar has been 
sustained as the business has navigated 
its way through some challenging periods 
in recent years.  As a Board, we appreciate 
the hard work of our colleagues as they’ve 
supported our improved performance for the 
benefit of all our stakeholders.  
The pressures in the industry are abating and 
we have a focused growth strategy to deliver 
true scale for Tekmar as a leading global 
offshore energy services business. 
Our commitment as a Board is to be careful 
stewards of capital and to promote the best 
interests of Tekmar’s people and shareholders 
as we position the business for long-term 
success. 
Thank you.  
Steve Lockard
Chairman 
Chairman Statement

10
www.tekmargroup.com
11
In December 2024, alongside our trading 
update for FY24, we communicated to the 
market a summary of our three-year plan to 
transform Tekmar and realise this potential. 
We are executing this plan with a business 
that is positioned for growth and with great 
people and strong industry pedigree. The 
services we offer across the full lifecycle 
of offshore energy projects from front 
end engineering and design, installation, 
operation and decommissioning perform a 
critical role in ensuring security and certainty 
of supply from offshore assets. Our holistic 
offering across our protection and assurance 
technology and engineering services sets us 
apart in the market and puts us ahead of the 
competition. 
FY24 Performance and FY25 Outlook  
FY24 was a transitionary year for Tekmar, 
where we focused on the basics - providing 
high-quality engineering, delivering on time 
and 
maintaining 
consistent 
commercial 
discipline. 
The Group reported Adjusted EBITDA of 
£1.7m, an increase of £1.1m on a like-for-
like basis reflecting the disposal of Subsea 
Innovation. The improvement in EBITDA 
primarily reflects consistency of execution, 
with a material improvement in gross margin 
to 32% and was achieved despite market 
conditions which remained challenging in 
FY24. This is a stable and solid platform 
against which the business can drive 
profitable growth. 
On a statutory basis, the Group’s result for the 
period before tax from continuing operations 
was a loss of £4.5m, an improvement of £4m 
versus the previous year. FY24 includes an 
impairment charge of £1.5m, a provision of 
£0.5m in respect of an aged debt balance and 
£0.7m provision in respect of warranty claims. 
The prior year includes a £4.7m impairment 
charge. This reflects and underlying trading 
improvement of £0.8m. 
The Group closed the year with £4.6m of 
cash at bank (2023: £5.2m) in addition to the 
availability of undrawn working capital debt 
facilities of £0.8m with Barclays. The Group’s 
net debt position, including all debt except 
right of use property leases, was £1.6m at the 
end of the financial year (2023: £1.4m). 
As we look ahead, we are encouraged that 
the market environment is improving and 
supports sustained demand for Tekmar’s 
technology and engineering services across 
our markets. Moreover, we believe Tekmar’s 
differentiated technology positions the Group 
to outperform this improving market. This is 
supported by the Group’s developing sales 
pipeline, however it will take time for this 
activity to convert to orders and revenue. 
Accordingly, 
we 
believe 
a 
reasonable 
expectation is for EBITDA for FY25 to be 
consistent with FY24, and for the phasing 
of EBITDA generation to be second half 
weighted. This is aligned with our primary 
focus on increasing order intake through 
2025 to position the Group for improved 
performance in 2026 and beyond. 
The Company continues to maintain tight 
controls on managing the cash requirements 
of the business to support growth and working 
capital, including disciplined capex and 
targeted investment in products and services 
that represent the greatest opportunity for 
near-term growth.
CEO Review
I joined the business as CEO in September 2024. Having 
worked across the offshore energy markets for more than 
15 years, I know the Tekmar business, the customers and 
supply chain. It is clear to me that Tekmar has exceptional 
growth potential.  

www.tekmargroup.com
12
www.tekmargroup.com
13
Accelerating the level of EBITDA and 
cash generation of the Group is key in our 
assessment of opportunities as we look to 
build scale, strengthen the technology and 
services we offer customers, and expand 
our reach in targeted geographies. A robust 
acquisition pipeline has been developed 
and 
the 
Board 
is 
actively 
assessing 
complementary acquisition targets. 
Ongoing legacy defect notifications 
Tekmar have continued with their commitment 
in working with relevant installers and 
operators, to investigate further the root 
cause of ongoing legacy defect notifications. 
This has been undertaken without prejudice 
and on the basis that Tekmar has consistently 
denied any responsibility for these issues. 
Given the extensive uncertainties, the RCA 
investigations have not concluded that the 
Tekmar products are defective. 
Working in collaboration with the relevant 
2 customers, Tekmar have explored the 
insurance available for such matters not 
withstanding Tekmar’s position regarding 
responsibility and liability. In this regard, 
the Group have negotiated a commercial 
settlement with its EXPL insurance provider 
of £5.2m in relation to the above claims. The 
insurance proceeds are available for use 
at the discretion of the Group in settlement 
of the above claims, with any unused cash 
repayable to the insurer. 
Within the result for FY24 there is a net 
charge of £0.7m recognised in the P&L. This 
represents the net impact of the provision 
of £5.8m offset by the insurance monies 
received post year end of £5.2m. 
The business is positioned for growth, our 
markets are aligned for growth and our 
strategic plan focuses on delivering this 
growth.. I have a track record of driving 
growth in my previous leadership roles and 
we have the opportunity to do the same at 
Tekmar building our financial strength. We 
have renewed purpose for what Tekmar can 
achieve and we look forward to updating 
investors with our progress over the course 
of the year.  
Richard Turner 
Chief Executive Officer 
3 March 2025 
CEO’s Review continued
Favourable 
Markets 
Support 
Sustained 
Demand for Tekmar’s Technology  
The key indicators across offshore energy 
markets are consistent with an improving 
market environment.  
In offshore wind, there is now a higher volume 
of projects being sanctioned than ever 
before as the market moves into recovery 
and builds momentum after the challenges 
of recent years. The lead indicators support 
this improving trajectory, with record Final 
Investment Decision (“FID”) in 2023 and 
2024, with 12.3GW and 13.1GW respectively 
reversing the pause in 2022 when 0.8GW 
of offshore wind capacity was consented. 
Linked to this, industry analysts forecast 1,000 
turbines per year will be installed through 
2028, increasing to 2,000 by 2030. Demand 
is expanding globally, with Europe remaining 
the anchor growth market, particularly the 
UK. In addition, turbine OEMs are reporting 
improved financial performance and cable 
manufacturers 
are 
reporting 
stronger 
backlogs. Activity levels across the oil and 
gas industry highlight the continued high 
and sustained levels of CAPEX and OPEX, 
with this investment increasingly recognised 
as essential to support energy transition. 
These factors in turn indicate supply chain 
capacity will be stretched and supports 
sustained demand for Tekmar’s technology 
and engineering services.  
Our three-year plan supports a step-change 
in Tekmar’s scale  
We have developed a three-year plan rooted 
in driving significant organic growth across 
the Group’s existing portfolio of products 
and services, along with an iterative product 
development programme and complementary 
M&A. 
This 
addresses 
the 
importance 
of Tekmar achieving greater scale with 
significant profitability gains driven by the 
benefit of operational gearing. The following 
opportunities are integral to the plan: 
•	
capitalise on our industry pedigree and 
differentiated technology to drive order 
intake and outperform a growing market 
•	
drive higher utilisation rates across the 
business, achieved through the balance 
of scale of projects and duration of 
projects 
•	
reweighting of revenue streams towards 
and a shift to higher margin services 
•	
investment in our grouting capability 
which provides compelling near-term 
returns  
•	
incremental investment in our 
technology roadmap to support product 
development and market diversification  
•	
resolve outstanding legacy issues 
relating to notifications of potential 
defects 
•	
continued refinement of the org model 
and deployment of Tekmar best practice 
programme across the business.  
Our M&A strategy complements the organic 
growth opportunity   
The organic growth plan is complemented by 
the Group’s ambitious M&A strategy to deliver 
additional scale and diversification. This 
plan is supported by the £18m of funding 
available through the SCF convertible loan 
note instrument and the relevant experience 
and relationships across the Board and the 
broader business.

14
www.tekmargroup.com
15
A 
summary 
of 
the 
Group’s 
financial 
performance is as follows:        
Note, due to the sale of Subsea Innovation Limited in the year, 
comparative figures have been restated to exclude Subsea 
Innovation Limited as this is now included as discontinued 
operations in the Statement of Comprehensive Income 
12M ended 
Sep 24
£m
12M ended 
Sep 23
£m
Revenue
32.8
35.6
Gross Profit
10.5
8.3
Adjusted 
EBITDA (1)
1.7
0.6
LBT from 
continuing 
operations
(4.5)
(8.5)
Loss for the 
period from 
continuing 
operations
(5.1)
(8.8)
EPS
(3.74p)
(9.2p)
Adjusted 
EPS (2)
(1.00p)
(3.2p)
(1) Adjusted EBITDA is a key metric used by the Directors.  
‘Earnings 
before 
interest, 
tax, 
depreciation 
and 
amortisation’ are adjusted for material items of a one-
off nature and significant items which allow comparable 
business performance. Details of the adjustments can 
be found in the adjusted EBITDA section below. Adjusted 
EBITDA might not be comparable to other companies. 
(2) Adjusted EPS is a key metric used by the Directors 
and measures earnings which are adjusted for material 
items of a one-off nature and significant items which allow 
comparable business performance.  Earnings for EPS 
calculation are adjusted for share-based payments, £160k 
(£508k FY23), amortisation on acquired intangibles £98k 
(£168k FY23), Impairment of goodwill £1,546k (£4,745k 
FY23), warranty provision £656k (2023: £nil), expected 
credit loss £520k (2023:£nil) and other one-off items £399k 
(FY23: £430k) and the tax impact of £351k (FY23: £22k). 
On a statutory basis, the Group loss from 
continuing operations was £5.13m (FY23: 
£8.8m loss). 
Overview 
For the year ended 30 September 2024, the 
Group reported revenue of £32.8m, reflecting 
an 8% decrease compared to FY23.  The 
decrease in revenue is due to the Marine 
Civils Division delivering lower revenue in 
the period as expected against a particularly 
strong prior year comparator.
Despite the revenue decrease, the Group 
achieved a 27% increase in Gross Profit 
to £10.5m versus £8.3m in the previous 
reporting period . This improvement in margin 
performance is attributable to the success 
of the Group’s margin improvement action 
plans which have been focused on securing 
contracts with suitably attractive project 
economics followed by disciplined execution 
of these projects. 
The Group’s adjusted EBITDA for the year 
was £1.7m, compared to £0.6m in FY23.  This 
was primarily as a result of stronger gross 
margins. 
The Group’s loss before tax from continuing 
operations of £4.5m has been impacted by a 
goodwill impairment charge in relation to the 
offshore energy division of £1.5m, net charge 
to the P&L of £0.7m in relation to the warranty 
related matters and £0.5m in relation to 
expected credit losses discussed below. 
Discontinued Operation 
As part of Tekmar Group’s strategic focus 
on strengthening the Group’s performance 
through efficient resource allocation and 
portfolio management, during the period, the 
Group completed the divestment of Subsea 
Innovation Limited (SIL) to Unique Group 
for £1.9m.  As a result of the disposal, the 
financial performance of Subsea Innovation 
Limited (sold in May 24) is classified as a 
discontinued operation and consolidated
Group Financial Review
The Group delivered further improvement in its financial 
performance in FY24, delivering the highest full-year 
Adjusted EBITDA reported by the Group since FY20.  This 
was driven primarily as a result of significant improvement 
in gross profit margins despite market conditions remaining 
challenging during the period.   

www.tekmargroup.com
16
www.tekmargroup.com
17
further investment in the grouting service 
line offering. This diversification, which has 
predominantly been in the Middle East to 
date, is expected to continue as a growth area 
for the Group and will be replicated in other 
regions as the asset base is increased. 
The gross profit for the reporting period 
increased by £2.2m to £10.5m, with a 
significant increase in gross profit percentage 
from 23% in FY23 to 32% in FY24. The growth 
in profit margins results from the Group’s 
improved contracting policies and project 
execution. There was also a specific focus in 
the year on strategic supply chain initiatives 
which further contributed to the improvement. 
Within the Offshore Energy division, gross 
margins increased from 17% for FY23 to 29% 
for FY24. FY23 was impacted as the opening 
order book included two, sizable, lower 
margin offshore wind contracts awarded in 
prior periods and has experienced material 
cost escalations from wider macro-economic 
factors since their award in 2021. One of 
these contracts was substantially complete 
in FY23 with the other being substantially 
complete in FY24 and will have no material 
impact on FY25 margin. 
Gross profit margin within Marine Civils 
increased to 35.9% from 29.1%.  This was 
primarily due to strong contribution from 
variation orders in the period and also service 
based income from equipment hire.  Whilst 
this level of gross profit margin is not expected 
to be repeated in FY25 to the same extent, 
the Group is focused on the diversification 
of revenues to offshore services alongside 
traditional 
protection 
and 
stabilisation 
product sales and has incrementally invested 
in the asset base throughout the period to 
support this transition. 
Operating expenses 
Operating expenses for the 12-month period 
to 30 September 2024 were £14.4m compared 
to £16.3m for the previous 12-month period 
ending 30 September 2023. The decrease of 
£1.9m relates largely to a goodwill impairment 
relating to the offshore energy CGU of £4.7m 
in the prior period versus an impairment of 
£1.5m in FY24, offset by a £0.5m charge 
to the P&L for expected credit losses and 
£0.7m warranty provision charge to the P&L 
for ongoing defect notices.  Other costs have 
been managed carefully and remained stable 
despite the inflationary environment. 
Adjusted EBITDA  
Adjusted EBITDA is a primary measure used 
by management to monitor and provide a 
consistent measure of trading performance 
from one period to the next.  The adjustments 
to EBITDA remove material items of a 
one-off nature or of such significance that 
they are considered relevant to the user of 
the financial statements as it represents 
a useful measure that is reflective of the 
comparable performance of the business. 
Foreign exchange losses and gains form 
part of the adjustment to EBITDA, this is due 
to the significant influence of exchange rate 
fluctuations versus the Group’s reporting 
currency (GBP) in FY23. The adjustment to 
EBITDA for foreign exchange is also shown 
in FY24 for consistency and comparability 
with FY23 results. For transparency of the 
FY24 result, details of foreign exchange 
transactions for FY24 are highlighted below.   
Group Financial Review continued
into a single line item in the Statement 
of Comprehensive Income. This line item 
includes the post-tax profit or loss of the 
discontinued operation, as well as any gains 
or losses from the sale or remeasurement of 
the assets associated with the discontinued 
operation. 
A 
loss 
from 
discontinued 
operations of £1.3m has been recognised in 
FY24, further details can be found in note 26 of 
the annual report. The prior periods have been 
restated to reflect the discontinued operation 
ensuring consistency and comparability. 
Revenue and Gross Profit
Revenue by operating segment
£m
12M
FY 24
12M
FY23
Offshore 
Energy
19.5
17.3
Marine Civils
13.3
18.3
Total
32.8
35.6
Gross profit by operating segment
£m
12M 
FY 24
12M
FY23
Offshore 
Energy
5.7
3
Marine Civils
4.8
5.3
Total
10.5
8.3
Revenue by market
£m
12M FY 24
12M FY23
Offshore 
Wind
17.1
17.7
Other 
Offshore
15.7
17.9
Total
32.8
35.6
Gross profit by market
£m
12M FY 24
12M FY23
Offshore 
Wind
5.5
4.8
Other 
Offshore
6.0
5.1
Unallocated 
costs
(1.0)
(1.6)
Total
10.5
8.3
It is encouraging to see a continuation of 
revenue growth in the Offshore Energy division 
during the period. Revenues in this division 
increased by 13% in FY24 and 24% in FY23. 
The Offshore Energy division incorporates 
Tekmar Energy and Ryder business units, 
both of which are beginning to benefit from 
the improvement in the offshore renewables 
market and a higher volume of projects being 
sanctioned.  
Marine Civils division experienced a decline 
in revenue for the 12-month period at 
£13.3m, which is £5.0m lower compared with 
revenue of £18.3m for the previous 12-month 
period.  The prior year performance had been 
particularly strong and included several large 
Middle East contracts which were completed 
in the prior period.
Consistent with the approach of the Offshore 
Energy division, the Marine Civils division, 
comprising Pipeshield International, has 
focused 
on 
delivering 
more 
profitable 
contracts.  As a result, this has led to higher 
gross margin for the division in comparison 
to previous periods since acquisition, despite 
the decrease in revenue in the period.
Marine Civils has continued to supply the 
core Pipeshield product lines as well as

www.tekmargroup.com
18
www.tekmargroup.com
19
period. This divestment aligns with Tekmar’s 
strategy to drive profitable growth and 
improve its financial performance.   
Profit/(loss) for the year 
The result for the period is a loss of £6.6m 
(FY23: Loss of £10.1m) which is shown in 
the Statement of Comprehensive Income 
on page 119.  The result includes a £1.3m 
loss attributable to the disposal of Subsea 
Innovation with the loss for the period from 
continuing operations being £5.3m. 
Foreign currency 
The Group has continued to see growth in 
international markets and, as a result, this 
increases the Group’s exposure to fluctuations 
in foreign currency rates. During the year, the 
Group was impacted by foreign exchange 
losses of £0.6m. These losses have been 
accounted for within operating expenses.   
The Group mitigates exposure to fluctuations 
in foreign exchange rates by the use 
of derivatives, mainly forward currency 
contracts and options. At the year end the 
Group held forward currency contracts to 
mitigate the risk of receivables balances for 
both Euros and Dollars. Any gains or losses 
on derivative instruments are accounted for 
in cost of sales. At the year end the Group had 
a derivative asset of £0.3m. 
The Group predominately trades in pounds 
sterling with its principal currency exposures 
including approximately 17% of revenue 
denominated in Euros and 23% denominated 
in US dollars. In prior years there has been 
a material level of trading in Chinese RMB 
which has now reduced although the Group 
had £2m billed debtors in RMB at the FY24 
period end.  On certain overseas projects the 
Group can, in some cases, create a natural 
hedge by matching the currency of the supply 
chain to the contracting currency, this helps 
to mitigate the Group’s exposure to foreign 
currency fluctuations. The Groups net loss 
from FX in FY24 is generated predominantly 
from outstanding balances denominated 
in RMB, the uncertainty surrounding the 
recovery of these balances has resulted in 
the Group being unable to effectively hedge 
against these transactions which have 
resulted in FX losses of c.£0.5m over the past 
2 financial years. 
Cashflows and Balance Sheet
A summary balance sheet is presented below:
£m
12M
FY 24
12M
FY23
Fixed Assets
4.5
6.8
Other non-
current 
assets
19.6
19.4
Inventory
1.9
2.1
Trade 
& other 
receivables
20.3
19.7
Cash
4.6
5.2
Current 
liabilities
(20.9)
(16.9)
Non-current 
liabilities
(1.8)
(1.7)
Equity
28.2
34.6
Other key balance sheet items 
Included within other current liabilities is a 
provision of £5.1m and non-current liabilities 
a provision of £0.7m. The provision covers 
the warranty matters outlined in note 20 of 
Group Financial Review continued
The below table shows the adjustments that have been 
made to calculate adjusted EBITDA in the year ended 30 
September 2024. 
EBITDA 
Reconciliation (£m) 
12M
FY 24
12M
FY23
Reported operating 
(loss)/profit
(3.8)
(7.9)
Amortisation of 
acquired intangible 
assets
0.1
0.1
Amortisation of 
other intangible 
assets
0.3
0.4
Depreciation on 
tangible assets 
0.9
0.7
Depreciation on ROU 
assets 
0.4
0.5
EBITDA
Adjusted items:
(2.1)
(6.2)
Share Based 
Payments 
0.2
0.5
Impairment of 
goodwill 
1.5
4.7
Exceptional items - 
Bonus
-
0.3
Implementation of 
accounting System
0.2
-
Warranty provision
0.6
-
Expected credit loss
0.5
-
Foreign exchange 
losses
0.6
0.9
Restructuring costs 
0.2
0.3
Adjusted EBITDA
1.7
0.6
EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA have shown 
significant improvement from FY23 in line 
with our profit improvement focus. Growth in 
adjusted EBITDA is attributed to the growth in 
Gross Profit discussed above. Both divisions 
reported positive Adjusted EBITDA for FY24, 
which has resulted in an overall positive 
Adjusted EBITDA for the Group in the period.
Adjusted EBITDA by division
£m
12M
FY 24
12M
FY23
Offshore 
Energy
1.5
(1.2)
Marine Civils
2.9
3.5
Group costs
(2.7)
(1.8)
Total
1.7
0.6
Group costs increased by £0.9m largely due 
to an increase in staff costs of £0.4m; wage 
inflation and increased share based payments 
related to management incentive schemes 
launched, £0.2m increase in professional 
fees and £0.1m higher bank facility fees.
Subsea Innovation Divestment 
In May 2024, Tekmar Group plc completed 
the divestment of Subsea Innovation Limited 
(SIL) to Unique Group for a cash consideration 
of £1.9m. This strategic move was part of 
Tekmar’s broader plan to enhance its financial 
stability and focus on core operations. SIL, 
which specialises in subsea products and 
engineering consultancy for the energy 
sector, had previously reported an adjusted 
EBITDA loss of £1.4m in 2023. The sale has 
allowed Tekmar to reallocate resources more 
efficiently and invest in growth areas. Tekmar 
retained ownership of Innovation House, the 
premises previously occupied by SIL.  As 
part of the transaction, the Group agreed 
for Subsea Innovation to use the property 
on a rent-free basis for a 12-month period 
following Completion, with an option for both 
parties to enter into a lease agreement for a 
further 12 months following the rent-free 

www.tekmargroup.com
20
www.tekmargroup.com
21
These amounts are not in dispute from the 
customer, however given the range of possible 
outcomes and duration of the outstanding 
debt, the Group have made an expected credit 
loss provision in relation to the outstanding 
China debt of 0.5m. Further details can be 
found in note 16 of the Annual Report. 
All other receivables are considered to be fully 
recoverable on the basis that previous trading 
history sets a precedent that these balances 
will be received.   
Than annual impairment review of the 
goodwill on the balance sheet has resulted in 
an impairment charge of £1.5m (2023: £4.7m) 
which related to the offshore energy division. 
This was predominantly due to consultancy 
element of the offshore wind division growing 
below market rate as expected in the previous 
year. 
The net cash outflow from investing activities 
was £2.0m with Group capital expenditure in 
the period totalling £1.9m.  These projects 
primarily relate to investment in Grouting 
equipment and other service-related assets 
which are able to provide near term cash and 
profit generation. An additional £0.2m also 
related to the Group’s main manufacturing 
facility.  
Relating to the sale of Subsea Innovation, 
the Group received £0.2m cash proceeds. 
The remaining deferred consideration of 
£1.7m relating to this disposal falls into FY25 
and at the year-end is included within other 
receivables on the balance sheet.  £1.2m 
of the deferred consideration has been 
received since the balance sheet date with a 
further £0.5m due 12-months following the 
transaction date. 
Net cash outflows from financing activities of 
£1.6m related to £0.4m net movement on the 
Group’s trade loan facility, £0.5m due to the 
repayment of lease borrowings with £0.8m 
attributable to interest payments on the 
Group’s banking facilities.  
As noted in the basis of preparation on page 
142, due to the required annual renewal of our 
banking facilities and the uncertain timing 
of contract awards the Group has disclosed 
a material uncertainty in relation to going 
concern. Management remains confident 
of that the relationship with Barclays and 
positive growth outlook for the offshore 
energy market will ensure sufficient liquidity 
for the Group. 
A continued focus on cash management 
remains to ensure growth and working capital 
can be supported as the business scales. 
Summary 
The 
business 
improvement 
measures 
implemented in recent years have led to a 
stabilised and streamlined business with both 
divisions now delivering profit at the adjusted 
EBITDA level.  There is a strong foundation 
now from which the Group can scale and 
become more resilient. The key drivers of this 
being diversified revenues and cashflows, 
operational gearing benefits and improving 
market conditions in sectors in which Tekmar 
operates.   
Leanne Wilkinson 
Chief Financial Officer 
3 March 2025
Group Financial Review continued
the Group financial statements, with these 
matters having been disclosed as contingent 
liabilities 
in 
the 
prior 
year’s 
financial 
statements.  A corresponding receivable due 
from the Groups EXPL insurance of £5.2m is 
included within Trade & other receivables. The 
net charge in the year to the P&L is £0.7m.  
Cashflows and cash balances 
The gross cash balance at 30 September 
2024 was £4.6m with net debt (gross cash 
less bank facilities) of £1.6m. The Group’s 
cash position at year end is comparable to 
the prior period end, where gross cash was 
£5.2m with Net debt of £1.4m.  
The Group has extended its CBILs facility of 
£3.0m for a further 12 months to October 
2025 and the UKEF backed trade loan facility 
of £4.0m remains available to Tekmar, with 
the next annual review date with Barclays 
Bank being in June 2025. These facilities 
continue to support the working capital 
requirements of the Group in delivering the 
projects the Group undertakes. The expected 
continued renewal of the banking facilities 
forms part of the Directors going concern 
assumptions which are detailed on page 101. 
Of the £4.0m trade loan facility available, 
£3.2m was drawn against supplier payments 
at the year end and is repayable within 90 
days of drawdown. The FY23 comparative 
is £3.6m. The change in the value borrowed 
is dependent on the timing of the loan 
drawdowns and the Groups immediate 
funding requirements. The trade loan facility 
balance and the CBILS loan of £3.0m are 
reported within current liabilities as both 
are fully repayable within 12 months of the 
balance sheet date. 
For FY24, the Group generated cash flows 
from operations of £3.3m. The main driver 
of the increase was the successful recovery 
of final milestone balances on completed 
contracts within the Middle East region. 
Historically these balances have taken longer 
to be recovered. 
The 
Group’s 
ageing 
profile 
for 
trade 
receivables 
significantly 
improved, 
with 
almost 50% of balances for FY24 being within 
standard credit terms compared to 21% in the 
comparative period.  This benefit has arisen 
from the Group’s enhanced contracting terms 
and cash collection processes implemented 
in previous periods. 
The Group holds a debt of £2m outside of 
standard credit terms with a customer in 
China. 
Historically the Group has recovered 100% 
of receivable balances and no credit losses 
have previously been accounted for. However 
at the year end, the Group has made a credit 
loss provision in line with IFRS9 of £0.5m in 
relation to a specific historic debt in China. The 
Group continues to operate in global markets 
where payment practices surrounding large 
contracts can be different to those within 
Europe. The flow of funds on large capital 
projects within China tend to move only 
when the windfarm developer approves the 
completion of the project. The Group has a 
number of trade receivable balances, within 
its subsidiary based in China, which have 
been past due for more than 1 year. At 30th 
September 2024 the value of these overdue 
trade receivables was £2.0m, of a total 
outstanding trade receivable balance for the 
entity was £2.2m. 

www.tekmargroup.com
22
www.tekmargroup.com
23
www.tekmargroup.com
Our extensive and unrivalled track record 
includes: 
•	
Over 100,000 subsea stabilisation 
products in service worldwide. 
•	
More than 10,000 Cable Protection 
Systems (CPS) supplied to over 
120 projects across 25 countries, 
demonstrating Tekmar’s global reach and 
leaders hip. 
•	
Delivery of 160,000+ geotechnical design 
hours and 180,000+ advanced analysis 
hours, underlining our technical expertise 
and market-leading capabilities. 
•	
This foundation of proven performance, 
global reach, and engineering excellence 
underpins Tekmar’s ability to lead in the 
offshore energy sector.
A Stable and Profitable Platform 
Over the past year, Tekmar has strengthened 
its foundations, establishing a stable and 
profitable platform to support future growth. 
Key operational and financial improvements 
have reinforced our ability to deliver sustainable 
results and capture emerging opportunities. 
•	
Operational efficiency: Enhanced 
utilisation of existing capacity has 
improved cost control and productivity. 
•	
Growing enquiry book: Robust demand 
across offshore wind, oil and gas, and 
marine civils has resulted in a strong and 
growing pipeline. 
•	
Improved profitability: Focused execution 
and disciplined cost management have 
delivered enhanced EBITDA margins. 
This stable platform provides Tekmar with the 
resilience and flexibility to pursue its ambitions 
with confidence, positioning us for the next 
stage of our transformation.
Introducing Project Aurora 
In 
response 
to 
the 
rapidly 
growing 
opportunities in offshore wind and the global 
energy transition, Tekmar has launched 
Project Aurora. This transformative three-year 
strategic plan is designed to deliver scale, 
resilience, and financial strength, capitalising 
on Tekmar’s established leadership position. 
By targeting organic growth, operational 
efficiency, and market diversification, Project 
Aurora provides a clear roadmap for Tekmar’s 
continued success. The plan focuses on 
leveraging our leading portfolio of products 
and services to ensure we not only maintain 
our position as the trusted global leader in 
offshore energy solutions but also set new 
standards of innovation and value creation in 
the industry. 
The global challenge to achieve net zero carbon 
emissions by 2050 is driving exponential 
growth in offshore wind and associated 
Operations and Maintenance (O&M) markets. 
Offshore wind remains at the heart of the 
energy transition, and Tekmar’s solutions play 
a critical role in supporting this transformation. 
Project Aurora ensures we capitalise on these 
trends and continue to lead the industry’s 
response.
Our AMBITION is to: 
•	
Double Tekmar’s revenue through organic 
growth, underpinned by disciplined 
investment and operational synergies. 
•	
Achieve a sustainable mid to high teens 
EBITDA margin in the later years of the 
plan. 
Strategic Review
Our Strategy: Delivering Growth, Scale, and Resilience
Tekmar is the leading engineering and technology company 
providing innovative solutions to the offshore energy 
sector. With a proven ability to deliver critical subsea 
protection, stabilisation, and engineering solutions, we have 
established ourselves as the trusted partner of choice for 
the most demanding offshore projects. 

www.tekmargroup.com
24
www.tekmargroup.com
25
www.tekmargroup.com
•	
Reinforce Tekmar’s industry leadership 
position as a trusted partner and solution 
provider. 
•	
Expand Tekmar’s technical capability, 
service offering, and geographical reach 
to capitalise on the global offshore wind 
opportunity. 
•	
Provide our people with the tools, 
strategies, and resources needed to 
deliver success. 
Our VALUE PROPOSITION: 
•	
Superior global reach and customer 
focus. 
•	
Solving complex engineering challenges 
for clients. 
•	
De-risking and optimising customer 
projects. 
•	
Enhancing safety, reliability and lowering 
project costs. 
Delivery of Project Aurora will enable Tekmar 
to diversify further into the offshore wind 
market, strengthen our financial resilience, and 
establish a scalable platform for sustained 
growth.
Key Focus Areas 
1. Organic Growth 
•	
Expand across offshore wind, oil and gas, 
and marine civils, building on our existing 
market leadership. 
•	
Drive geographical growth with a focus 
on Europe, USA, and the Middle East. 
•	
Deploy Pipeshield solutions in Europe 
while expanding Tekmar Energy’s reach 
in the Middle East, leveraging synergies 
across the Group. 
•	
Enhanced high-strength grouting 
solutions to enhance subsea stabilisation 
capabilities.
2. Operational Gearing 
•	
Improve returns by increasing utilisation 
rates across the business. 
•	
Realise profitability gains through 
operational leverage and ongoing 
investment in product development. 
•	
Transition to higher-margin engineering 
services to deliver sustainable growth. 
3. Scaling the Business 
•	
Grow product and service sales through a 
targeted sales growth strategy. 
•	
Enhance technical capabilities and scale 
Ryder to address new opportunities. 
•	
Develop a robust technology roadmap 
to deliver innovation across all market 
sectors.
4. Financial Resilience 
•	
Diversify revenue streams to build 
sustainable earnings and reduce volatility.
•	
Improve EBITDA margins and drive free 
cash generation to fund growth and 
strengthen reserves. 
•	
Deliver positive and growing returns on 
capital employed. 
Strategic Review continued
5. Mergers and Acquisitions 
•	
Our ambitious M&A strategy accelerates 
growth, scale, and diversification, 
complementing Tekmar’s organic growth 
plans. 
•	
Strategic capital: Our partnership with 
SCF provides access to £18m through the 
Convertible Loan Note (CLN), supporting 
strategic acquisitions. 
•	
Focused approach: The executive team 
has mapped over 40 potential acquisition 
opportunities, prioritised against strict 
criteria. 
Key criteria include: 
•	
Positive EBITDA and strong cash 
generation. 
•	
Market consolidation opportunities to 
strengthen Tekmar’s position. 
•	
Expansion into new geographies and 
complementary markets. 
•	
Future-facing technologies with growth 
potential. 
•	
Alignment with the “brown to green” 
energy transition. 
Through disciplined execution, Tekmar’s M&A 
strategy will accelerate growth while delivering 
value to shareholders.
Diversification: Multi-Sector Growth Strategy 
Tekmar’s strategy enhances our involvement 
across the entire project lifecycle, driving 
growth in multiple sectors: 
•	
Offshore Wind: Reinforce our leadership 
position while developing innovative 
solutions for emerging floating wind 
technologies. 
•	
Offshore Oil and Gas: Expand our offering 
to support reliable subsea infrastructure 
solutions. 
•	
Marine Civils: Grow our presence in port 
development and coastal infrastructure 
markets, where stabilisation solutions are 
critical. 
•	
Operations & Maintenance: Leverage our 
track record to grow our presence in life 
extension and O&M services. 
This multi-sector focus ensures Tekmar 
delivers sustainable and diversified growth 
across key global markets.
Building a Durable Business – Positioned for 
Success 
Tekmar’s 
transformation 
under 
Project 
Aurora is underpinned by strong leadership, 
operational excellence, and a clear focus on 
delivery: 
•	
Experienced leadership: A refreshed 
management team, led by Richard Turner, 
brings focus, expertise, and strategic 
execution. 
•	
Results-driven Board: Our Board ensures 
disciplined stewardship and drives 
accountability for shareholder value. 
•	
Performance focus: We are committed 
to profitable growth, sustainable cash 
generation, and delivering strong returns 
on capital. 
With a solid track record, a stable platform, 
and a clear strategic vision, Tekmar is well-
positioned to capitalise on global growth 
opportunities and deliver long-term value—no 
matter the pace of the energy transition.

www.tekmargroup.com
26
www.tekmargroup.com
27
In accordance with section 172(1) (a)-(f) 
of the Companies Act 2006, a Director of 
a company must act in the way he or she 
considers, in good faith, would be most likely 
to promote the success of the Group for the 
benefit of its members as a whole. This is a 
period of transition for Tekmar, with a number 
of new additions to both the executive and 
non-executive teams, with a core focus on a 
strategy review covering the next five years 
that will position the Group for success. 
Particular attention has been paid to key 
areas to ensure the long term success of the 
Company, including:  
•	
The implementation of the new Group 
strategy 
•	
The improvement of engagement with 
the Group’s shareholders  
•	
The interests of the Group’s employees 
•	
The need to cultivate the Group’s 
business relationships with customers 
and suppliers 
•	
The impact of the Group’s operations on 
the community and the environment 
•	
The desirability of the Group maintaining 
a reputation for high standards of 
business conduct 
•	
The need to act fairly between members 
of the Group 
The Board recognises that stakeholder 
communication is critical in delivering long 
term value for Tekmar. As part of the strategy 
review, there has been an evaluation of 
the level of engagement the Company has 
achieved and the Board has agreed that 
Tekmar should commit to increasing those 
levels, both internally within the business and 
with external stakeholders.  
Shareholders  
Tekmar would like to take this opportunity to 
renew its commitment to ensuring improved 
communication 
with 
the 
Company’s 
shareholders. Historically, the CEO and CFO 
have met with institutional investors at least 
on a bi-annual basis, both in person and 
virtually. In the future, the Tekmar Board will 
be in regular communication with the broader 
shareholder base of Tekmar, including retail 
investors. New avenues of communication 
have commenced and include the Annual 
Report and Financial Statements, the Interim 
Report, the AGM and the Group’s website. 
The Company also seeks improved levels 
of communication with a bolstered financial 
PR and Investor Relations function, the use 
of the Investor Meet Company platform and 
a commitment to host investors at Tekmar’s 
facilities 
where 
appropriate. 
Additional 
information in relation to the Company, 
garnered from these engagements will be 
relayed back to the Board by the CEO and 
CFO, to ensure the concerns of shareholders 
are promptly addressed. 
All Directors will normally attend each AGM 
and shareholders are given the opportunity 
to ask questions. The most recent AGM 
was held on 27 March 2024. Shareholders 
voted on each resolution by way of a poll, 
the results of which were published on the 
Company website: https://investors.tekmar.
co.uk/investors/circulars-and-notices/.
In addition to our shareholders, other key 
stakeholders for Tekmar include the Group’s 
employees, customers and suppliers. The 
views and opinions expressed by these 
Groups are crucial to the Board’s decision-
making process.  
Section 172 Statement

www.tekmargroup.com
28
www.tekmargroup.com
29
Customers & Suppliers  
Managing 
Tekmar’s 
relationships 
with 
customers and suppliers is of the utmost 
importance to the Group as it embarks on 
its new growth strategy. The Group has 
several contracts with customers that relate 
to longer term technology development and 
supply which are supported by dedicated 
account teams. The Group has a dedicated 
Legal function that operates with the Group’s 
commercial, project and production teams 
and those of the Group’s key customers and 
suppliers. It is the Board’s intention to behave 
responsibly and ensure that management 
operate the business in a responsible manner, 
operating within the high standards of 
business conduct and good governance and 
in doing so, will contribute to the successful 
delivery of growth. The Board receives regular 
updates on our relationships with suppliers 
and customers.   
Environment & Community  
The impact of the Group’s operations on the 
community and the environment are a key 
concern to the Board. Tekmar has an ongoing 
commitment to sustainability, innovation, and 
community engagement. 2024 has been a 
remarkable period of growth and learning as 
Tekmar continues benchmark itself against 
industry standards and strive to set new 
benchmarks for the future.  
The Company strives to minimise or mitigate 
any harm that it might do and actively seeks 
to contribute positively to the environment 
and the communities in which it operates. 
In FY24 the business has undertaken a 
Carbon Footprint measurement exercise, a 
significant step in our sustainability journey. 
The next step being undertaken FY25 is to 
establish and commence delivering a carbon 
reduction action plan. The business currently 
holds Ecovadis Silver status accreditation 
with a key priority for FY25 being progression 
to Gold status, representing the company’s 
commitment to sustainable and ethical 
practices. 
Section 172 Statement continued
The Tekmar Team  
The overarching success of the Group’s 
growth and ability to implement the new 
strategic plans are dependent on our people, 
the 
Board 
recognises 
the 
importance 
of investing in our team and curating an 
environment that cultivates success.  
The development and retention of our people 
remained a key area of focus during FY24. 
The Company has been focusing its efforts 
on improving rates of employee retention 
over the past two years and is pleased with 
the improved sustained result which shall 
continue to be a key measure into FY25. This 
was achieved through implementing a three-
year staged benefits refresh program and 
listening to the feedback shared from the 
annual employee engagement survey. The 
training and development of our teams plays 
a key part in this, alongside ensuring quality 
performance and development conversations 
are taking place. 
The Group has a range of communication 
channels which encourage Employee Voice, 
in the form of annual surveys, employee 
engagement forums, and Open Door, an 
anonymous feedback and question channel. 
We 
are 
committed 
to 
enhancing 
our 
communications and engagement strategy. 
The most recent addition to this is the ‘vertical 
slice’ sessions hosted by CEO Richard Turner, 
whereby a cross section of employees from 
across the Company have a one-hour meeting 
with Richard in an open forum discussion. 
HiveHR tool is utilised for employee surveying, 
celebrating and recognising colleagues, and 
submitting anonymous questions, concerns 
or feedback.   
From FY25, engagement metrics (eNPS and 
engagement index) are monitored as key 
measures with quarterly pulse surveys in 
place. The results from the annual employee 
engagement survey are used as a benchmark 
to improve upon year on year. Clear action 
plans are devised which highlight areas of 
focus and are led by the Senior Leadership 
Team with HR support to drive cultural 
change and improvements.   
Tekmar continues with its commitment 
to focus on diversity and inclusion as it 
grows, ensuring the workplace represents 
the communities in which it operates. The 
Group has a Business Integrity Policy that 
communicates 
the 
expected 
business 
behaviours of all employees, and this policy 
incorporates a whistleblowing policy, noting 
an employee’s responsibility should they 
become aware of inappropriate business 
behaviours or any similar concern. 
We are proud of Tekmar Group’s diverse 
nationality mix, represented by 12 nationalities 
across 133 employees, operating across 
our various regions.  Throughout FY25 we 
are embarking upon an EDI improvement 
journey, which begins with a current state 
assessment of the whole Group. This leads 
to the commencement of the journey, which 
will be driven by leadership and will involve 
awareness sessions, training, policy review 
and further actions.
More information on the Company’s 
approach to ESG and the efforts of the 
ESG committee can be found in our 
Sustainability Report on page 44. The 
2023 version of the QCA Code applies 
to financial years beginning on or after 
1 April 2024 and therefore it will report 
our approach to applying the updated 
principles in our Annual Report in 2025.

www.tekmargroup.com
30
www.tekmargroup.com
31
www.tekmargroup.com
A New Era for Offshore Energy 
The global offshore energy market is at a 
pivotal period.  
Governments worldwide are accelerating 
efforts to achieve net zero emissions, and 
along with this setting ambitious targets for 
renewable energy deployment. Offshore wind 
plays a central role in this transition. Today 
there is operational capacity nearing 75 GW . 
China leads with 36.2 GW, followed by the UK 
(14.8 GW) and Germany (8.2 GW). Projections 
indicate total capacity could reach 410 GW by 
2035.[1]  
Simultaneously, oil and gas remains critical 
to energy security and certainty of supply, 
which has undergone a resurgence due to its 
criticality in the energy transition roadmap. 
Recent forecasts indicate global offshore oil 
and gas expenditure is expected to grow by 
over 20% annually through 2025.[2] 
Offshore Wind 
Navigating the Offshore Wind Quadrilemma 
The offshore wind industry has navigated a 
challenging “Quadrilemma”: 
•	
Rapidly reducing Strike Prices: 
Developers engaged in aggressive pricing 
competition, often relying on speculative 
future technology advancements and 
cost reductions that failed to materialise. 
This created impaired project economics 
and delayed projects. 
•	
Macroeconomic pressures: Rising 
inflation and central bank interest rate 
hikes significantly increased project 
costs. For instance, the Euro Area’s main 
interest rate rose from -% to 4.5% within 
two years.[3] 
•	
Cost inflation: Post covid and amidst the 
Russian / Ukrainian conflict material and 
energy prices soared further hampering 
project economics. 
•	
Operational failures: Industry-wide 
reliability challenges affected OPEX 
costs. Insurance claims have increased 
significantly in the last 10 years, 
undermined confidence in operating cost 
models. 
These factors ultimately led to delays in 
Final Investment Decisions (FIDs): with 
several developers withdrawing from planned 
investments and auction, for example AR5 in 
the UK attracted no bidders. Despite these 
hurdles, the industry has entered a period of 
recovery. Strike prices have been significantly 
corrected (eg UK AR6 £73 - https://www.
gov.uk/government/publications/contracts-
for-difference-cfd-allocation-round-6-
results), demonstrating recognition from the 
Government of changing economic forces as 
well as reinforcing their primary commitment 
which is to decarbonising the energy supply 
chain to achieve net zero. Furthermore, 
material costs and interest rates have 
stabilised and reliability is being assured by 
developers adopting a more integrated, end-
to-end system design approach, ensuring a 
cost effective and reliable solution.
Globally, a cumulative 119.8 GW is post-
FID (including operational projects, under 
construction, and projects in construction 
phase). To meet our 2035 forecast for 
credible growth, an FID rate of 6.6 GW/quarter 
is needed.
Market Review
The offshore energy market is undergoing significant 
change, this presents Tekmar Group with a significant 
opportunity to augment its market position. This outlook 
explores the key trends, challenges, and opportunities in the 
offshore wind and oil and gas sectors, informed by broader 
market analysis. 

www.tekmargroup.com
32
www.tekmargroup.com
33
Oil and Gas 
The Energy Transition: Balancing Oil and Gas 
with Offshore Wind 
Achieving 
net 
zero 
emissions 
while 
maintaining global energy security requires 
a balanced approach that integrates both 
renewable and traditional energy sources. 
Offshore wind offers a sustainable solution 
to reducing carbon emissions, while oil and 
gas, in conjunction with Carbon Capture 
and Storage (CCS) provide the predictability 
needed to support the transition without 
significant intermittency. According to the 
Climate Change Committee, a pragmatic 
energy mix that leverages the strengths of 
both sectors is essential for meeting climate 
goals. Investments in technologies like CCS 
and Hydrogen and advancements in offshore 
wind capacity can accelerate the shift towards 
a cleaner, more resilient energy landscape. 
[Climate Change Committee] 
Subsea Infrastructure Spending to Surpass 
$10 Billion Annually 
Renewed Momentum in Oil and Gas: The 
Transition Partner 
Oil and gas remain a cornerstone of global 
energy security, with increasing activity driven 
by higher energy prices and technological 
advancements. 
Simultaneously, 
offshore 
oil and gas developments are ramping up 
in regions like Brazil and the Gulf of Mexico, 
with global offshore oil and gas expenditure 
expected to grow by over 20% annually through 
2025.[2]
Marine Civils and Ports: Enabling Offshore 
Energy Expansion 
The expansion of offshore energy projects 
necessitates substantial investment in port 
infrastructure and marine civil engineering, 
presenting significant opportunities for Tekmar 
Group. As the offshore wind sector aims to 
increase capacity from 73.6 GW in Q3 2024 to 
258 GW by 2030, ports play a pivotal role in the 
assembly, transportation, and maintenance 
of wind turbines and related equipment. 
WindEurope estimates that approximately 
€6.5 billion in port infrastructure investments 
is required by 2030 to support this growth.[6] 
Marine civil engineering is also experiencing 
robust growth, driven by the demands of 
offshore energy developments. The global 
marine 
(offshore) 
engineering 
market 
was valued at USD 105 billion in 2023 and 
is projected to reach USD 155 billion by 
2030, growing at a CAGR of 5.96%.[7] This 
growth underscores the increasing need for 
specialized infrastructure to support offshore 
installations. 
Investments in port facilities are crucial 
for the efficient deployment of offshore 
wind projects, with even further investment 
needed as the floating offshore wind market 
grows. Enhancing port capabilities can 
reduce logistics costs and streamline the 
supply chain, contributing to the overall cost-
effectiveness of offshore wind energy. For 
instance, investments of €0.5-€1 billion in new 
port infrastructure could help the offshore 
wind sector cut costs by up to 5.3%.[6] 
In summary, the synergy between offshore 
energy expansion and port infrastructure 
development is vital. Strategic investments 
in marine civil engineering and port facilities 
not only support the scaling of offshore wind 
and oil and gas projects but also enhance 
operational efficiency and cost-effectiveness, 
aligning with Tekmar Group’s objectives in the 
evolving energy landscape.
Market Review continued
Winds of Change and Opportunity: A Holistic 
Transformation 
The offshore wind market is experiencing a 
confluence of favourable developments:[5] 
•	
Global Expansion of Offshore Wind: While 
Europe, particularly the UK, remains a 
key hub, the sector is globalising with 
significant growth in Asia-Pacific markets 
such as South Korea, Taiwan, and Japan. 
Offshore wind activity is forecast to 
reach 410 GW by the end of 2035, driven 
by an annual growth rate of 11.8%, with 
additional buildout peaking in Europe 
around 2030. 
•	
Floating Offshore Wind: 4C Offshore 
forecasts 26.3 GW of floating offshore 
wind capacity to be installed or underway 
globally by 2035. 
•	
Global Outlook: Growth from 74.6 GW to 
410 GW by 2035 
74.6GW fully commissioned by region
101.4W under construction by region
36%
19%
15%
10%
3%
9%
8%
25%
36%
5%
10%
4%
5%
7%
8%
49%
20%
11%
6%
4%
3%2% 5%
119.8W under construction by region
China
United Kingdom
United States
Germany
Netherlands
Denmark
Belgium
Taiwan
Others

www.tekmargroup.com
www.tekmargroup.com
35
Over the past few years Tekmars’ growth rate has 
not been in line with the offshore energy market. The 
offshore energy market is now entering an exciting era, 
driven by global energy transition goals and increasing 
demand for reliable infrastructure. While the sector 
continues to face challenges, stabilising economic 
conditions and a growing commitment to sustainable 
energy solutions underpin it’s long-term growth 
potential, which Tekmar is well positioned to take 
advantage of.  
34
 Charting the Future of Offshore Energy 
Footnotes 
1.	
4C Offshore, Global Offshore Wind Report (Q4 2024). 
2.	
Rystad Energy, “From Shale to Offshore: Global Oil and Gas 
Industry Dynamics Are Shifting” (14 August 2024). 
3.	
European Central Bank, Monetary Policy Reports (2023). 
4.	
UK Government, “Recent Offshore Wind Strike Price 
Adjustments Reflecting Market Realities” (2023). 
5.	
Subsea World News, “Global Subsea Spending Projections 
Show Promising Growth” (2023). 
6.	
WindEurope, “Upscaling Europe’s Port Infrastructure Critical for 
Offshore Wind Development” (27 May 2021). 
7.	
Verified Market Reports, “Marine Offshore Engineering Market 
Analysis” (October 2024).

www.tekmargroup.com
36
www.tekmargroup.com
37
www.tekmargroup.com
www.tekmargroup.com
37
Group revenues are divided into the following 
sectors and subsectors. Across the Group 
there are no customers that are unique to any 
one business. There is potential for all Group 
companies to work with all customers that the 
Group engages, allowing the Group to cross-
sell all products and services; work together 
to provide value to the same clients, generate 
more revenue per client and to provide a 
complementary range of technology and 
services that support multiple stages of the 
project life cycle. 
As the business grows, our goal is to increase 
the revenue per project from all stages of 
offshore energy and marine civils projects. 
We also have an aim to gain visibility on 
upcoming projects as early as possible, with 
our design and analysis businesses helping 
us achieve this.
Sectors: 
Offshore 
Wind, 
Oil 
& 
Gas, 
Interconnectors, Wave & Tidal, Marine Civils, 
Telecoms 
Applications: Subsea Cables, Rigid & Flexible 
Pipelines, Umbilicals, Seabed. 
Customers: Developers & Operators, EPCI 
Contractors, Product & Service Providers 
Project 
Phases: 
DEVEX 
Development 
Expenditure, CAPEX Project Build Phase, 
OPEX Project O&M.  
Product Categories: Geotechnical Design & 
Analysis, Engineering Analysis & Software 
Innovation,  Subsea Protection Technology, 
Subsea Stability and Protection Solutions.
Locations include:  UK, Europe, USA, Middle 
East and Asia Pacific.
Our business model
Tekmar Group plc collaborates with its partners to deliver 
robust and sustainable engineering led solutions that enable 
the world’s energy transition. We have a clear strategy 
focused on strengthening Tekmar’s value proposition as an 
engineering solutions-led business that offers integrated 
and differentiated technology, services and products to our 
global customer base. 
Revenue split 
by region
45%
Middle East
30%
APAC
21%
Europe
2%
USA
2%
Rest of world
Revenue split 
by market
52%
Renewables
48%
Other offshore
Revenue split 
products & 
services
90%
Products
10%
Services
58%
Offshore Energy
42%
Marine Civils

www.tekmargroup.com
38
www.tekmargroup.com
39
www.tekmargroup.com
Tekmar Group plc is a leading provider of cable 
protection systems (CPS) for the global offshore 
wind market. With over 10,000 CPS systems supplied 
to more than 120 offshore wind projects across 25 
countries, we are proud to protect over 40GW of 
installed offshore wind capacity, a figure unrivalled 
across the industry. Our ability to deliver integrated 
subsea cable protection solutions that overcome 
challenging offshore environments sets us apart. By 
combining in-house technology, advanced engineering 
capabilities, and decades of experience, Tekmar 
ensures that every project benefits from informed, 
engineering-led decisions grounded in simulation, 
analysis, and proven expertise. 
Tekmar Energy, part of Tekmar Group plc, was awarded 
a contract to design, manufacture, and deliver a subsea 
cable protection solution for one of the world’s largest 
offshore wind farms. The CPS was required to protect 
the wind farm’s inter-array cables when transitioning 
from the seabed to the offshore foundations. Due to the 
project’s challenging subsea conditions, an additional 
solution was needed to secure the CPS and cables on 
the seabed to prevent movement and avoid damage. 
This was achieved through an integrated approach to 
the engineering design phase within the overall project 
lifecycle. 
Working alongside RYDER, Tekmar Energy developed a 
CPS design premise and a basis for analysis aligned to 
the project specifications and site conditions. A system 
was subsequently designed by Tekmar Energy, based 
on the company’s proven Generation 10 TekTube CPS 
technology. 
During the initial design phase, advanced simulation 
tools were used to model how the CPS would perform 
in its offshore environment. This was supported by 
RYDER, which contributed geotechnical expertise to 
design a stabilisation solution. A rock berm installation 
was recommended to secure the CPS on the seabed. 
Using cutting-edge geotechnical engineering software, 
RYDER optimised the design to minimise the volume 
of rock material required, significantly reducing the 
project’s CAPEX while meeting all performance criteria. 
The CPS was manufactured at Tekmar Energy’s state-
of-the-art facility in the North East of England. Before 
commencing production of over 2,300 components, 
Tekmar Energy created prototypes of each component 
and subjected them to rigorous testing, including 
impact, bend, and axial load tests, to verify performance. 
Full-scale pull-in tests were performed on a 30-metre-
long CPS assembly using the facility’s advanced pull-in 
rig. Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) were then carried 
out on all pre-assembled CPS sections before packing 
and delivery to the customer. 
The final solution was a robust, maintenance-free 
cable protection system engineered to meet the 
project’s specific site conditions and ensure reliability 
throughout the wind farm’s lifecycle. By eliminating 
the need for OPEX-heavy interventions, the solution 
offered significant long-term savings to the customer. 
Tekmar’s integrated approach provides complete 
visibility across the CPS design and delivery process. 
This collaboration between Tekmar Energy and RYDER 
ensures seamless communication, rapid problem-
solving, and enhanced optimisation opportunities at 
every stage of the project. For customers, this single-
interface approach eliminates third-party delays, 
reduces risks, and ensures efficient delivery of the 
optimal solution. 
Our operating companies share a unified vision and a 
commitment to delivering industry-leading solutions 
for the offshore wind sector, reinforcing Tekmar 
Group’s position as the trusted partner of choice for 
global offshore wind projects.
Our business model 
in action
Unrivalled in Offshore Wind 

www.tekmargroup.com
40
www.tekmargroup.com
41
www.tekmargroup.com
Tekmar Group companies Pipeshield International 
and Ryder collaborated to deliver an advanced scour 
protection solution for a leading port authority. Drawing 
on Tekmar’s extensive track record, which includes 
over 100,000 subsea stabilisation products in service 
and more than 340,000 engineering hours logged, the 
team provided a cost-effective and environmentally 
sustainable solution that addressed the unique 
challenges of this project. 
The integrated approach comprised three key projects: 
Vessel Study 
By combining tidal and vessel tracking data (AIS), the 
team reduced uncertainty in the design parameters 
through high-level data analysis. This enabled the 
consideration of different vessel sizes and revealed 
that the ‘maximum design vessel’ provided by the client 
was not necessarily the worst-case scenario for seabed 
stability. The analysis showed that larger vessels 
tended to un/berth during higher tides, and the most 
onerous vessels, regardless of size, were identified. 
This insight ensured that the scour protection design 
was tailored to actual vessel behaviour, reducing over-
conservatism in the design process. 
Mattress Stability 
Following PIANC (2015) guidelines, RYDER assessed 
the stability of the mattress under propeller and 
thruster action generated by the most onerous vessels 
identified in the study. The results confirmed that rock 
bags would be required along the quay wall to mitigate 
thruster effects. These rock bags were shown to be 
stable against the quay wall, while the mattresses 
themselves were stable under propeller action and 
metocean conditions. However, the study highlighted 
that some vessel input parameters had been estimated 
using generalised equations and that the Coefficient 
of Lift for the mattress units was not well-defined, 
necessitating further verification. 
3D CFD Study 
RYDER conducted a two-stage Computational Fluid 
Dynamics (CFD) analysis using OpenFOAM to recreate 
on-bottom conditions and simulate worst-case flows 
generated by the most onerous vessel combined with 
metocean conditions. The results demonstrated the 
efficiency of Pipeshield’s N2 edge block design, which 
produced a negative Coefficient of Lift. This induced a 
positive restoring moment at the top of the edge block, 
ensuring stability. 
The study also found that the Coefficient of Lift for the 
central blocks in the mattress stability report was overly 
conservative, revealing an additional safety factor of 
1.3 on top of the already applied 1.5. Furthermore, 
a Python database of vessel inputs showed that 
the 
mathematical 
methods 
used 
to 
estimate 
vessel properties, such as propeller diameter, were 
overestimated. This led to increased conservatism in 
the design and confirmed that the scour protection 
solution was robust under real-world conditions. 
The Result 
The solution provided by Pipeshield and RYDER 
demonstrated a seamless integration of expertise 
across Tekmar Group to deliver a tailored scour 
protection system. By leveraging the Group’s combined 
knowledge and advanced analysis capabilities, the 
team achieved a design that was both cost-effective 
and 
environmentally 
sustainable. 
The 
project 
exemplifies how Tekmar Group’s operating companies 
collaborate to provide innovative, efficient, and reliable 
solutions to complex offshore challenges. 
Our business model 
in action continued
Delivering Advanced Scour Protection for a Leading Port Authority

www.tekmargroup.com
42
www.tekmargroup.com
43
www.tekmargroup.com
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) such as Revenue, Order Intake, Order Book, Adjusted EBITDA and net cash / 
(debt) are crucial in assessing Tekmar Group PLC’s performance. Revenue reflects the total income generated 
from sales, indicating the company’s market demand and operational efficiency. Order Intake measures the 
value of new contracts awarded within a period, showcasing the company’s ability to secure new business. 
The Order Book represents signed and committed contracts, providing insight into future revenue streams and 
business stability. Adjusted EBITDA (Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and significant one 
off items, as defined in CFO review.) offers a clear view of the company’s operational profitability by excluding 
non-operational expenses, thus highlighting core business performance.  
Key Performance 
Indictators
KPI
FY22
FY23
FY24
Order Book (1)
£15m
£16.7m
£16.3m
Revenue (2)
£25.6m
£35.6m
£32.8m
Gross profit %
23%
23%
32%
Order Intake (3)
£33.2m
£37.4m
£32.4m
Adjusted EBITDA (4)
£(2.3)m
£0.6m
£1.7m
Net cash/(debt) (5)
£1.5m
£(1.4)m
£(1.6)m
(1) Order Book is defined as signed and committed contracts with clients.  
(2) Revenue is the value of sales recognised in the financial statements in the year. 
(3) Order intake is the value of contracts awarded in the in the year. 
(4) Adjusted Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and significant one off items, as defined in CFO review. 
(5) Net cash / (debt) represents total cash less banking facilities. 
Note – comparatives have been restated to remove Subsea Innovation Limited. 

P. 
44
P. 
45
www.tekmargroup.com
44
www.tekmargroup.com
45
www.tekmargroup.com
Throughout 2024, we have worked diligently to advance our 
Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) initiatives, 
with a particular emphasis on understanding and action 
planning to improve our carbon footprint. As a result of 
this, one of our key achievements this year was conducting 
a comprehensive carbon measurement management 
exercise, supported by an independent third party, allowing 
us to gain clearer insights into our environmental impact 
and identify areas for further improvement. This effort 
marks an important step in our journey, and we are proud 
of the progress made.
Following on from our Educational Links programme 
established in 2023 and subsequent collaborations, we have 
also been actively engaged in our community, supporting 
and participating in several STEM events with local colleges 
and schools. These initiatives are not just about inspiring the 
next generation of engineers and scientists but also about 
fostering a culture of innovation and sustainability. Our 
commitment to STEM was recognized when Tekmar Group 
was named one of the most inspirational companies in the 
North East by the North East STEM Awards, a testament to 
our efforts in promoting education and career opportunities 
in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics.
Linked to this, at the same event, we were immensely 
proud of our own Dawn Gaskins who received 
a Special Recognition Award, highlighting her 
dedication and contributions to our sustainability 
and ESG initiatives. Dawn’s leadership and passion 
have been pivotal in driving our projects forward, and 
her recognition is a proud moment for all of us at 
Tekmar Group.
In addition to our STEM activities, we joined hands 
with communities worldwide to participate in World 
Clean Up Day 2024. This global event underscored 
our commitment to environmental stewardship 
and allowed our teams to actively contribute to a 
cleaner and healthier planet. Such initiatives reflect 
our broader philosophy of making a positive impact, 
not only through our products and services but also 
through our actions within the communities we serve 
and collaboration with our value chain.
The world has faced unprecedented challenges 
in recent years, resulting in protracted impacts on 
companies like ours.  Understandably, our journey in 
this time has included rebuilding strong foundations 
in our business as well as financial resilience.  
Ultimately, Tekmar as an organisation which will 
continue to grow sustainably alongside our end 
markets to meet the ever increasing global energy 
demand.  
We are proud of the business we have today and that 
in tandem with the business improvement measures 
implemented and strengthened governance 
and controls, we have also been able to provide 
prosperity for our wider stakeholders including our 
employees, industry and local community.  
While we recognise that we are still at the early 
stages of our sustainability journey, 2024 has 
been a year of significant progress. We have set 
ambitious goals, benchmarked ourselves against 
peers, and taken key actions to go further than we 
ever have before. Our focus remains on continuous 
improvement, and we are excited about the future 
as we deepen our commitment to sustainability and 
ESG excellence.
I invite you to explore this report to learn more about 
our initiatives, achievements, and the steps we are 
taking to contribute to a more sustainable future. 
Finally, I would like to thank the ESG leads and STEM 
ambassadors who have been instrumental in driving 
our plans forward and to the wider Tekmar team for 
their support to our initiatives this year.
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer / ESG Committee 
Chair
Dear valued stakeholders,
I am pleased to introduce Tekmar Group’s 2024 
Sustainability Report, a reflection of our ongoing 
commitment to sustainability, innovation, and community 
engagement. This year has been a remarkable period of 
growth and learning in our sustainability journey as we 
continue to understand our impacts and dependencies on 
society and strive to set new goals for the future.
Sustainability 
Report 2024

P. 
46
P. 
47
www.tekmargroup.com
47
www.tekmargroup.com
46
www.tekmargroup.com
Meet the Environmental, 
Social and Governance 
Committee
The ESG Committee at Tekmar Group is dedicated to driving our 
environmental, social, and governance initiatives, ensuring alignment 
with our vision to enable the world’s energy transition and uphold our 
commitment to sustainable and responsible growth.
The ESG Committee at Tekmar Group is a diverse 
and dynamic team that brings together individuals 
from across all areas of our business. This broad 
representation ensures that our environmental, 
social, and governance initiatives are inclusive and 
reflective of our entire organisation. 
By leveraging the unique perspectives and 
expertise of our team members, the committee 
can identify opportunities, address challenges, and 
drive impactful ESG strategies that align with our 
company vision and values. Each member of the 
ESG Committee focuses on a specific aspect of 
ESG, enabling us to address these critical areas with 
precision and depth. 
From environmental stewardship, such as reducing 
our carbon footprint and enhancing sustainability 
practices, to social initiatives that support our 
communities and promote diversity, equity, 
and inclusion, every member plays a vital role. 
Committee members are dedicated to ensuring 
our governance practices meet the highest ethical 
standards, providing transparency and accountability 
across all levels of our operations. Together, this 
multidisciplinary approach ensures a holistic and 
integrated focus on ESG.
We are deeply grateful to our ESG Committee 
members for their dedication and contributions, 
which have been key to advancing initiatives like 
STEM programs and sustainability benchmarking. 
Their efforts embody the collaborative spirit of 
Tekmar Group and drive our progress.
In addition to our ESG Committee, we have additional 
employees who have supported the Company’s ESG 
initiatives throughout the year.
As we celebrate this year’s achievements, we 
recognise the vital role they play in our sustainability 
journey. 
1
Chief Financial Officer / ESG 
Committee Chair
Leanne Wilkinson
3
Head of People / Social Lead
Chloe Ainsworth
2
Supply Chain Manager / 
Environmental Lead
Lewis Barnes
6
General Counsel / Company 
Secretary / Governance Lead
Tallulah Whitewood-
Spedding

P. 
48
P. 
49
www.tekmargroup.com
48
www.tekmargroup.com
49
www.tekmargroup.com
Our vision, “To enable the world’s energy 
transition, reflecting our responsibility to 
future generations,” serves as a beacon for 
our ESG strategy. In a world where the shift 
towards cleaner, renewable energy sources 
is imperative, Tekmar Group is dedicated to 
being at the forefront of this transformation. 
This vision is not just about technological 
advancement; 
it 
embodies 
a 
broader 
commitment to creating a sustainable future. 
We understand that our actions today have far-
reaching implications, and we are determined 
to play a pivotal role in reducing environmental 
impact and promoting a cleaner, greener 
planet for generations to come.
Our ESG initiatives are aligned with this vision, 
focusing on minimising our carbon footprint, 
developing sustainable technologies, and 
supporting the global move towards renewable 
energy. Whether it is through pioneering new 
ways to make our products more energy-
efficient 
or 
participating 
in 
community 
initiatives 
that 
promote 
environmental 
awareness, our vision drives us to act 
responsibly and sustainably.
Our mission speaks to our commitment to 
collaboration and innovation: “Collaborating 
with our stakeholders, we will deliver robust, 
sustainable technology and services utilising 
our talented and diverse team that will 
enable the Group to grow significantly and 
profitably.”  This mission emphasises two 
critical components of our ESG approach: 
stakeholder engagement and sustainable 
growth.
We believe that sustainability is a collective 
effort. By actively collaborating with our 
customers, 
partners, 
and 
communities, 
we can create solutions that address both 
economic and environmental needs. This 
collaborative approach ensures that our 
technologies not only meet current market 
demands but also contribute to a long-term, 
sustainable future. Our mission guides us 
to continuously innovate and adapt, pushing 
the boundaries of what is possible while 
ensuring that our growth benefits both our 
stakeholders and the planet.
At Tekmar Group, our commitment to Environmental, 
Social, and Governance (ESG) excellence is deeply 
rooted in our core vision, mission, and values. These 
guiding principles shape every decision, action, and 
initiative we undertake, ensuring that our efforts 
contribute to a more sustainable future. 
How Tekmar Group’s Vision, Mission, and 
Values Drive Sustainability

P. 
50
P. 
51
www.tekmargroup.com
50
www.tekmargroup.com
51
www.tekmargroup.com
Moreover, our mission highlights the importance of 
utilising the diverse skills and talents of our team. 
Diversity, equity, and inclusion are key components 
of our social responsibility. By fostering a 
workplace that values varied perspectives, we can 
develop more creative and effective solutions that 
meet the needs of a changing world.
Values: The Foundation of Our ESG Approach
Our values – Work Together, Do Things Right, 
Break the Boundaries – serve as the foundation 
for how we approach ESG initiatives, ensuring that 
every effort is aligned with our broader purpose.
Work Together: Collaboration for a Sustainable 
Future:
“Work Together” underscores the importance of 
teamwork and collaboration without boundaries. 
We believe that the best solutions come from 
a collective effort, where every individual feels 
empowered, safe, and inspired. This value drives 
our approach to ESG by fostering partnerships that 
extend beyond our organisation. Whether we are 
engaging with local communities through STEM 
initiatives or collaborating with global partners on 
sustainability projects, working together ensures 
that our ESG efforts are inclusive, impactful, and 
far-reaching.
Internally, this value promotes a culture where 
our team members are encouraged to contribute 
ideas, voice concerns, and take ownership 
of sustainability initiatives. By nurturing an 
environment of trust and confidence, we empower 
our team to drive positive changes, both within the 
organisation and beyond.
Do Things Right: Integrity and Excellence in 
Sustainability
“Do Things Right” reflects our commitment to 
quality, integrity, and ethical conduct. We believe 
that sustainability is about more than compliance; 
it is about setting a higher standard and leading 
by example. This value drives us to challenge 
the norm, innovate responsibly, and ensure that 
our products and services are delivered with the 
utmost quality and efficiency.
In practice, this means implementing rigorous 
sustainability measures across our operations, 
from reducing waste and emissions to adopting 
ethical sourcing practices. We are committed to 
transparency and accountability in all that we do, 
and this commitment is a core element of our ESG 
strategy. By doing things right, we build trust with 
our stakeholders and demonstrate that profitability 
and sustainability can, and must, go hand in hand.
Break the Boundaries: Innovating for Tomorrow’s 
Solutions
“Break the Boundaries” captures our spirit of 
innovation and ambition. At Tekmar Group, we 
are constantly looking for new ways to develop 
technologies that make what seems impossible 
today a reality tomorrow. This value drives our 
efforts to push the boundaries of sustainable 
technology, seeking out solutions that not only 
meet current demands but anticipate future 
challenges.
Our dedication to innovation is evident in our 
ongoing efforts to improve the energy efficiency 
of our products, explore renewable energy 
applications, and invest in research and 
How Tekmar Group’s Vision, Mission, and 
Values Drive Sustainability
development that supports the global energy 
transition. By continuously seeking new ways to reduce 
environmental impact and enhance sustainability, we 
are not just adapting to change – we are leading it.
Explore this year’s case studies overleaf, to see how 
our ESG initiatives, from STEM collaborations to 
sustainability advancements, are driving meaningful 
impact and reflecting Tekmar Group’s commitment 
to a sustainable future.

P. 
52
P. 
53
www.tekmargroup.com
52
www.tekmargroup.com
53
www.tekmargroup.com
Looking back
2024 highlights
Tekmar Group 
Celebrates Success at 
the North East STEM 
Awards
We are incredibly proud of the achievements 
and milestones we’ve reached throughout 2024, 
each reflecting the dedication and passion of our 
employees and the impact of their efforts. These 
highlights showcase not only our commitment to 
sustainability and innovation but also the positive 
influence we’ve had on the communities we serve. 
We are deeply grateful to our team members who 
have supported these initiatives, volunteered their 
time, and brought their energy to every event. Their 
contributions embody the values of Tekmar Group 
and drive our mission to create lasting, meaningful 
change.
1
We continued inspiring the next 
generation by participating 
in Darlington STEMFEST, 
engaging with young minds and 
promoting careers in STEM.
2
As Silver Members of the 
North East STEM Foundation, 
we supported its mission 
through monthly donations 
and participated in the Primary 
Schools STEM Challenge in 
June.
3
We strengthened our 
partnership with UTC as 
official employer partners and 
participated in our first Industry 
Project, where the team 
working on a Tekmar project 
won.
4
Tekmar Group was nominated 
for ‘The Most Inspirational 
North East Engineering 
Employer,’ and Dawn Gaskins 
won the ‘Special Individual 
Recognition Award for 
Outstanding Contribution’.
Highlights
5
In our commitment to 
developing homegrown 
engineering talent, Tekmar 
successfully completed its first 
graduate onboarding, selecting 
four graduate engineers from 
over 300 applicants.
6
We hosted two wellbeing 
walks, promoting employee 
wellness while supporting 
employee-chosen, REMAP in 
June and Niemann-Pick UK 
in October, combining team 
bonding with charitable giving.
In October, Tekmar Group announced its recognition 
at the RTC North,  North East STEM Awards, where 
the company was nominated for “Most Inspirational 
North East Engineering Employer,” and Dawn Gaskins, 
Senior Project Coordinator at Tekmar Energy, was 
honored with the Special Individual Contribution 
Recognition Award. 
“I’ve been so passionate about working with 
the next generation over the last few years and 
our ambassadors and wider team at Tekmar 
by investing our time offering workplace visits, 
work experiences and going out into the region 
doing STEM events like #STEMFEST and 
#NESF STEM events at Yarm School and the 
upcoming STEM event at Hartlepool College in 
November, alongside setting Industry Projects 
for the year 10 and 12 students at UTC it’s been 
a busy and worthwhile few years! 
Dawn Gaskins, Senior Projects Co-Ordinator
These achievements highlight Tekmar Group’s 
ongoing 
commitment 
to 
fostering 
innovation, 
supporting STEM initiatives, and inspiring future 
generations of engineers across the North East. 
The acknowledgment underscores the dedication 
and hard work of the Tekmar team in promoting 
STEM engagement through educational programs, 
community outreach, and mentorship opportunities, 
solidifying the company’s role as a leader in the 
engineering industry.
7
We conducted a carbon 
capture analysis to explore 
innovative ways to offset 
our emissions, further 
strengthening our commitment 
to sustainability and 
environmental responsibility.
8
We continue to support our 
Manufacturing Operations 
Engineering apprenticeship, 
with our apprentice 
progressing into his third year 
of training.

P. 
54
P. 
55
www.tekmargroup.com
54
www.tekmargroup.com
55
www.tekmargroup.com
Wellbeing Walks: 
Supporting Employee 
Wellness and Charitable 
Causes
At Tekmar Group, our Wellbeing Walks embody our 
commitment to combining employee wellbeing 
with meaningful community impact. Recognising 
that physical and mental health are essential 
for a thriving workplace, we actively encourage 
initiatives that promote wellness, teamwork, and 
social responsibility. Our Wellbeing Walks provide 
an opportunity for employees to take a break from 
their daily routines, connect with colleagues in a 
relaxed setting, and engage in physical activity—
all while supporting important charitable causes.

In June, our team walked 8 miles to support REMAP, 
a charity that transforms lives by creating custom 
equipment for people with disabilities. Similarly, in 
October, we embarked on a 7.7-mile walk to raise 
awareness and funds for Niemann-Pick Disease, 
a rare genetic disorder, inspired by our colleague 
Dawn Gaskins’ personal connection to the cause. 
By matching employee donations for both events, 
Tekmar Group amplified the positive impact of 
these initiatives, reinforcing our commitment to 
social responsibility and community engagement.

These walks not only strengthened our team’s sense 
of community but also demonstrated how employee 
wellbeing, teamwork, and ESG principles can come 
together in a meaningful way. By bringing people 
together outside the workplace, we foster a supportive 
and inclusive culture where employees feel valued and 
engaged. Encouraging participation in initiatives like 
these helps to build connections, promote a healthy work-
life balance, and reinforce the importance of giving back.
“It’s fantastic to see so many colleagues come 
together for a great cause while also promoting 
physical and mental wellbeing. These walks 
aren’t just about raising money—they help 
build relationships, encourage teamwork, and 
give us all a chance to reset outside of the 
work environment. I’m proud to be part of an 
organisation that supports both its employees 
and the wider community in such a meaningful 
way.”
Steven Roberts, AR Project Co-Ordinator

We are incredibly proud of our employees’ generosity 
and enthusiasm and look forward to continuing these 
impactful efforts in the years to come.
A Journey of Success and 
Innovation
Tekmar Group is proud of our ongoing partnership 
with UTC South Durham, which began in 2022. Over 
the past three years, our collaboration has grown, 
driven by a shared commitment to inspiring and 
developing future engineering talent. We aim to bridge 
the gap between education and industry, equipping 
young people with the skills and confidence to thrive 
in STEM careers.

This year, we deepened our involvement by becoming 
an official employer partner, reinforcing our dedication 
to real-world learning experiences. Our first UTC 
Industry Project was a great success, with students 
tackling a live Tekmar challenge and showcasing 
impressive technical and problem-solving skills. We 
were especially proud when the team working on a 
Tekmar project won, demonstrating the potential of 
these young engineers.
At Tekmar, we are committed to developing future 
engineers and will continue to expand our engagement 
with UTC South Durham, offering more projects, 
mentoring, and hands-on experiences to nurture the 
next generation of STEM talent.
Beyond projects, we support students through career 
guidance, industry talks, and hands-on learning, 
helping to inspire interest and build confidence in 
STEM careers. Catherine Purvis Mawson, Principal 
of UTC South Durham, emphasised the value of such 
partnerships:

“Forming relationships with companies like 
Tekmar Group is crucial for our students. It 
provides them with exposure to real-world 
applications of their studies and opens 
pathways to exciting careers in STEM fields. 
We are grateful for Tekmar’s commitment to 
our students’ development and their continued 
support in making STEM accessible and 
appealing.”
Catherine Purvis Mawson
Principal of UTC South Durham

P. 
56
P. 
57
www.tekmargroup.com
56
www.tekmargroup.com
57
www.tekmargroup.com
World Clean Up Day 2024
Tekmar Group proudly participated in World Clean 
Up Day 2024, a global initiative dedicated to tackling 
pollution and promoting environmental responsibility. 
Organised by Let’s Do It World, World Clean Up Day 
unites millions of volunteers across 190 countries in 
a collective effort to remove waste, raise awareness, 
and drive positive change in local communities.

As part of our commitment to sustainability, a team 
of Tekmar Energy volunteers took time to clear litter 
around our manufacturing site and head office in 
Newton Aycliffe. This initiative reflects our company 
values—Do Things Right, Break Boundaries, and Work 
Together—showcasing our dedication to taking action 
beyond our day-to-day responsibilities.

A special thank you goes to Liam Bettinson and 
Joe Lincoln, whose leadership was instrumental in 
organising the event and bringing our team together. 
Their efforts demonstrate how collective action can 
make a meaningful difference in our communities.
Liam Bettinson reflected on the day’s success: 
“It was fantastic to see so many colleagues 
come together for a shared goal. Small actions 
like this have a big impact, and it’s great to 
work for a company that supports initiatives 
that give back to the environment and local 
community. Hopefully, this is something we 
can continue to build on in the future.”
Liam Bettinson, Commercial Manager

World Clean Up Day is more than just a one-day event—
it is a reminder of the responsibility we all share in 
protecting our environment. Tekmar Group remains 
committed to sustainable business practices and will 
continue to seek opportunities to support global and 
local initiatives that contribute to a cleaner, healthier 
future.
Tekmar Group’s Annual 
Food Bank Donation to 
Junction 7
As part of our ongoing commitment to supporting 
local communities, Tekmar Group once again 
contributed to Junction 7’s crisis intervention project 
through our annual food bank donation. Junction 7 
provides emergency food, preloved school uniforms, 
furniture assistance, financial support, and guidance 
to individuals and families facing hardship. Their work 
plays a vital role in offering immediate relief to those 
in need, particularly during the winter months when 
financial pressures often increase.

In winter 2024, Tekmar employees came together 
to donate several crates of essential food items, 
ensuring that those experiencing crisis had access 
to much-needed supplies. This initiative reflects our 
company values—Do Things Right, Break Boundaries, 
and Work Together—demonstrating the importance 
of collective action in making a positive impact.

A key part of Tekmar’s sustainability and social 
responsibility efforts is to give back to the communities 
where we live and work. By partnering with Junction 
7, we aim to help address food insecurity and provide 
support to individuals and families facing difficult 
circumstances.
Lynn Hood, HR Business Partner at Tekmar 
Group, highlighted the importance of this 
initiative, saying:
“Supporting Junction 7 is something we are 
incredibly proud of. It’s about more than just 
donating food—it’s about showing solidarity 
with those facing difficult times in our 
community. The generosity of our employees 
speaks volumes, and it’s fantastic to see 
how willing people are to help make a real 
difference.”
Lynn Hood, People Business Partner
Tekmar Group remains committed to continuing our 
support for Junction 7 and other local initiatives, 
ensuring that we play an active role in making a 
difference in the lives of those in need.

P. 
58
P. 
59
www.tekmargroup.com
58
www.tekmargroup.com
59
www.tekmargroup.com
For the first time, Tekmar Group has comprehensively 
measured its carbon emissions, marking a significant 
milestone in our sustainability journey. Understanding 
our environmental impact is the crucial first step in 
reducing it, and with this knowledge, we have now 
developed a Carbon Reduction Plan to guide our 
efforts. Our goal is clear: to achieve Net Zero emissions 
by 2050, aligning with global climate commitments 
and ensuring a sustainable future for our business, 
stakeholders, and future generations.
Our plan is built on science-based targets (SBTs), which 
set clear reduction goals in line with the latest climate 
science. This means reducing our absolute emissions 
by 90% from our baseline year before neutralising 
any remaining emissions through verified carbon 
offsets. To achieve this, we have outlined a structured 
approach to lower emissions across Scope 1, Scope 2, 
and Scope 3, setting measurable targets that will drive 
real progress towards decarbonisation.
Our Commitment to Carbon Reduction and
Net Zero
At Tekmar Group, sustainability is at the heart of our 
business strategy, and we are committed to achieving 
Net Zero emissions by 2050. To meet this ambitious 
goal, we have developed a Carbon Reduction Plan that 
aligns with science-based targets (SBTs) to ensure 
our efforts contribute meaningfully to global climate 
action. Science-based targets require companies to 
set greenhouse gas reduction goals that align with 
the reductions necessary to limit global temperature 
rise to 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels. Under this 
framework, we aim to reduce our absolute emissions 
by 90% from our baseline year before neutralising any 
residual emissions with verified carbon offsets.
Our Carbon Reduction Targets
To ensure measurable progress, we have established 
the following near-term and long-term targets:
Near-Term Target: Achieve Net Zero Scope 1 emissions 
by 2030.
Long-Term Target: Reduce our total Scope 1, 2, and 3 
emissions by at least 90% by 2050 and neutralise any 
remaining emissions through verified carbon offsets.
Future Scope 2 & 3 Targets: We will set near-term 
targets for Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions in the 
coming year once we have fully quantified a greater 
portion of our Scope 3 footprint.
Understanding Our Carbon Footprint
To drive meaningful change, it is crucial to understand 
where our emissions come from. We conducted 
a comprehensive carbon footprint assessment 
following the Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol, which 
categorises emissions into three scopes:
Scope 1: Direct emissions from sources owned or 
controlled by Tekmar Group, such as fuel combustion 
in company vehicles and facilities.
Scope 2: Indirect emissions from purchased electricity, 
steam, heating, and cooling used in our operations.
Scope 3: Indirect value chain emissions, including 
upstream and downstream activities such as employee 
commuting, business travel, supplier transportation, 
purchased goods and services, and product lifecycle 
impacts.
Baseline Emissions Measurement
A baseline emissions measurement provides a 
reference point against which future reductions can be 
measured. Tekmar Group has set 1st October 2022 – 
30th September 2023 as our baseline year, marking our 
first carbon reporting period. Our emissions have been 
measured using the operational control approach, 
ensuring we account for all Scope 1 and Scope 2 
sources, as well as key Scope 3 categories.
For Scope 3, we have quantified emissions from:
•	
Fuel- and energy-related activities
•	
Upstream transportation and distribution
•	
Waste generated in operations (including water-
related emissions)
•	
Business travel (including hotel-related emissions)
Employee commuting (including homeworking-
related emissions)
We have not yet quantified emissions from:
•	
Purchased goods and services
•	
Capital goods
•	
Processing, use, and end-of-life treatment of sold 
products
Key Findings from Our Carbon Assessment
Our largest source of emissions is upstream 
transportation, which includes emissions from the 
transport of incoming goods arranged by suppliers or 
Tekmar Group. Our second-largest category is fuel- 
and energy-related activities, which includes upstream 
energy use such as business travel and employee 
commuting. We have also accounted for emissions 
from electricity generation, fuel combustion, and 
well-to-tank emissions (extraction, processing, and 
transportation of fuels).
Next Steps: Turning Insights into Action
With a clear understanding of our emissions profile, 
Tekmar Group is focused on the following key actions:
Developing a Carbon Reduction Plan to address our 
core carbon hotspots and identify ways to reduce 
emissions across all scopes.
Setting additional near-term reduction targets for 
Scope 2 and Scope 3 to guide our journey towards Net 
Zero.
Engaging our team by promoting carbon literacy 
and encouraging sustainable practices across our 
operations.
Improving our data quality for future reporting to 
ensure more accurate tracking and compliance with 
evolving regulations.
As we continue on this journey, we remain committed 
to transparency and collaboration, sharing our progress 
with stakeholders and working together to make a 
lasting impact on the planet.
Lewis Barnes
Supply Chain Manager / Responsible for 
Environmental Initiatives
Measuring Our Carbon 
Footprint & Our 
Commitment to Net Zero
This year, we took a significant step in our sustainability journey by conducting 
a comprehensive exercise to measure our carbon footprint across the business, 
providing valuable insights to guide our future actions.
Scope 1
Scope 2
Scope 3
492.8
tCO2e
2165.8
tCO2e
448
tCO2e

P. 
60
P. 
61
www.tekmargroup.com
60
www.tekmargroup.com
61
www.tekmargroup.com
ESG Strategy & Commitment 
to Sustainability
Sustainability is a core part of our strategy, guiding 
decisions and shaping our long-term impact. Our ESG 
Strategy, aligned with the UN Sustainable Development 
Goals (UN SDGs), focuses on four key areas:
1.	 Governance – Ethical business conduct and 
compliance
2.	 Planet – Environmental sustainability and carbon 
reduction
3.	 People – Employee well-being, diversity, and 
inclusion
4.	 Prosperity – Innovation, economic resilience, and 
community engagement
Led by our ESG Committee, with representatives 
from across the business, we continue to implement 
structured and measurable initiatives that drive 
progress. 
Energy Transition & Innovation
Tekmar plays a key role in the offshore energy sector, 
supporting renewable energy growth while maintaining 
energy security. Tekmar aims to continue to be the 
leading provider of technology and services for the 
global offshore energy market.
As the sector evolves, we continue to invest in 
sustainability-driven 
technology, 
reducing 
the 
environmental impact of offshore projects and aligning 
our growth with global net-zero targets.
Carbon Reduction & Sustainability
Reducing our carbon footprint remains a priority as we 
work toward long-term sustainability goals. Following 
our first full carbon assessment, we have identified key 
emission sources and developed a tailored reduction 
strategy. Our focus remains on:
•	
Annual carbon measurement and reporting
•	
Engaging our supply chain in emissions reduction 
efforts
•	
Regionalising production and optimising logistics 
to lower transportation-related emissions
•	
Exploring onsite power generation feasibility
•	
Implementing sustainable workplace policies
As an EcoVadis network member, we continue working 
with customers and suppliers to improve sustainability 
practices across the value chain. 
Responsible Business & Governance
We uphold the highest standards of business integrity, 
transparency, and compliance. Our zero-tolerance 
policy on bribery, corruption, and unethical practices 
is reinforced by our Business Integrity Policy and 
compliance programme. Key governance initiatives:
•	
Mandatory compliance training for employees and 
contractors
•	
Annual risk assessments and policy updates
•	
Adherence to the QCA Corporate Governance Code
Certifications in ISO 45001 (Health & Safety), ISO 
14001 (Environmental Management), and ISO 
9001 (Quality Management)
Strong governance remains fundamental to our long-
term success as we continue expanding our global 
operations.
Our People: Culture, Inclusion & Development
Our People Strategy focuses on six core pillars:
•	
Modern Workplace
•	
Culture & Inclusion 
•	
Talent Attraction 
•	
Talent Development 
•	
Performance Management 
•	
Health & Wellbeing 
The FY25 people strategy supports the business 
strategy and growth ambitions. 
Communications and Engagement
In FY25 we are committing to an improved 
communications and engagement strategy which 
encompasses employee voice with continual feedback 
and involvement, which meets the requirements 
of today and supports our growth ambitions. The 
results of our HIVE Employee Engagement survey and 
quarterly eNPS pulse surveys will link to this, through 
implementing action plans and feedback channels 
including our Employee Engagement Forum. 
Reward & Recognition Strategy
In FY25, in line with our growth targets, we continue 
with steps to support the attraction, retention and 
motivation of our people via the creation of our reward 
& recognition strategy. Our reward & recognition 
strategy is designed to ensure our people feel valued 
and recognised for their contributions. By offering 
competitive and fair rewards, aligned with business 
performance and individual impact, we create a culture 
of excellence that supports sustainable growth.
Preparing teams for success
We are focusing on enabling teams to succeed via 
robust performance management and development 
frameworks, and providing managers with the toolkit 
required to have meaningful conversations via manager 
training. This includes ensuring team objectives 
have a clear link to the overall business strategy. 
We will leverage the technology of our HRIS utilising 
the appraisal system, enabling structured appraisal 
processes leading to performance conversations and 
understanding teams training and development needs. 
Looking ahead, this will link to succession planning 
and high-performance initiatives to further harness the 
potential of our people. 
Employment Practices & Human Rights
We are committed to upholding internationally 
recognised human rights standards, with a zero-
tolerance policy on child or forced labour. With 15 
nationalities represented across our workforce, we 
champion diversity and inclusion, further strengthened 
by our Tier 2 skilled worker sponsor license, which 
broadens our global talent pool.
Community Engagement & STEM Initiatives
Tekmar actively supports local communities through 
STEM education and outreach. Our employees 
volunteer as STEM Ambassadors, participating in:
•	
Work experience programmes
•	
Manufacturing facility tours
•	
Mock interviews and career fairs
•	
Judging student projects
We continue our partnerships with UTC South Durham 
and the North-East STEM Foundation, inspiring 
young people to pursue careers in engineering and 
technology.
Customers & Suppliers
Tekmar follows a customer-led strategy, working 
closely with energy majors, developers, and contractors 
worldwide. Supported by UK Export Finance, we 
continue to expand our export activities, ensuring long-
term trusted relationships with our supply chain.
We remain committed to:
•	
Transparency and legal compliance
•	
Respecting human rights across our supply chain
•	
Engaging with customers to solve industry 
challenges
Driving Business Improvements
Tekmar continues its collaboration with Sharing in 
Growth (SIG), focusing on sales pipeline expansion 
and continued operational efficiency.
Our customer satisfaction scorecard and Net Promoter 
Score (NPS) survey provide valuable insights, leading 
to key improvements:
•	
Expanded technical and sales support capacity for 
better responsiveness
•	
Adoption of Key Account Management (KAM) for 
enhanced customer focus
•	
Streamlined sales processes through commercial 
framework agreements
These initiatives strengthen our ability to deliver high-
quality, customer-focused solutions, ensuring Tekmar 
remains a trusted and competitive partner in the energy 
industry.
A Sustainable Future
By 
focusing 
on 
sustainability, 
innovation, 
and 
continuous improvement, Tekmar remains committed 
to shaping a responsible, future-ready business. We 
will continue to lead in offshore energy, supply chain 
sustainability, and responsible business practices, 
ensuring long-term growth, resilience, and impact.

P. 
62
P. 
63
www.tekmargroup.com
62
www.tekmargroup.com
63
www.tekmargroup.com
2025 ESG Goals: Driving 
Sustainability and Positive 
Impact
As we move into 2025, Tekmar Group remains 
committed to advancing our Environmental, Social, 
and Governance (ESG) initiatives. Building on 
the progress made in 2024, our key goals for the 
coming year focus on reducing our carbon footprint, 
supporting regulatory compliance, strengthening 
social impact, and enhancing sustainability within our 
supply chain. These initiatives align with our long-term 
strategy to become a more sustainable, inclusive, and 
forward-thinking organisation.
Environmental Goals (E)
Carbon Footprint Reduction
Following 
our 
first 
comprehensive 
carbon 
measurement exercise in 2024, we will take meaningful 
steps to reduce emissions across our operations. In 
2025, we will action-plan based on our findings, establish 
an annual measurement process, and work towards 
including the full complement of Scope 3 emissions.

Closed-Loop Manufacturing
We will explore opportunities to reduce waste and 
improve circularity in our operations by investigating 
end-of-life 
and 
closed-loop 
manufacturing 
solutions for PU waste. This initiative aligns with 
our commitment to sustainable resource use and 
minimising environmental impact.
Governance Goals (G)
CBAM Preparation
The Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM), 
introduced by the EU, places reporting and taxation 
obligations on carbon-intensive imports. While 
Tekmar is not directly impacted at this stage, we will 
proactively assess and report on GHG emissions in 
our exported products to support our customers in 
meeting compliance requirements. With CBAM set 
to be phased into the UK in 2026, taking early action 
will ensure we remain ahead of regulatory changes.

EcoVadis – Achieve Gold Standard
In 2025, we aim to progress from EcoVadis 
Committed status to Gold accreditation, extending 
our sustainability evaluation beyond our business 
to include suppliers and customers within our value 
chain. Strengthening ESG risk management and 
compliance will reinforce Tekmar’s position as a 
responsible industry leader.
Social Goals (S)
Communications and Engagementement
In FY25 we are committing to an improved 
communications and engagement strategy which 
encompasses employee voice with continual feedback 
and involvement, which meets the requirements of 
today and supports our growth ambitions. The results 
of our HIVE Employee Engagement survey and 
quarterly eNPS pulse surveys will link to this, through 
implementing action plans and feedback channels 
including our Employee Engagement Forum. Effective 
communication 
and 
meaningful 
engagement 
are fundamental to fostering a high-performing, 
collaborative culture at Tekmar Group. By ensuring 
our people are informed, involved, and heard, we 
strengthen alignment with our business strategy, 
driving 
innovation, 
accountability, 
and 
shared 
success. 
Reward & Recognition Strategy
In FY25, in line with our growth targets, we are putting 
the building blocks in place to support attraction, 
retention and motivation of our people via our reward & 
recognition strategy. Our reward & recognition strategy 
will ensure our people feel valued and recognised for 
their contributions. By offering competitive and fair 
rewards, aligned with business performance and 
individual impact, we create a culture of excellence 
that supports sustainable growth.
Looking Ahead
Our 2025  ESG goals reflect our commitment to 
sustainability, regulatory readiness, and social impact. 
By focusing on carbon reduction, ethical governance, 
and community engagement, we aim to create lasting 
positive change while driving business success.

We look forward to working collaboratively with our 
employees, customers, and partners to make 2025 a 
year of impactful progress.
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer / ESG Committee 
Chair

www.tekmargroup.com
64
www.tekmargroup.com
65
www.tekmargroup.com
With over 40 years of experience in the offshore 
energy sector, Tekmar has established itself 
as a trusted leader, delivering innovative 
engineering solutions that have driven the rapid 
growth of the global offshore wind market. In 
2024, the company welcomed Richard Turner 
as CEO, marking the beginning of an exciting 
new chapter for Tekmar. 
Richard brings with him a proven track record 
of leadership and transformation in global 
organisations, as well as extensive expertise in 
operational excellence, Lean methodologies, 
and business growth. With nearly two and a 
half decades of experience, spanning roles 
in engineering, manufacturing, and offshore 
energy, Richard’s career reflects his ability to 
deliver results in challenging environments 
and drive sustainable growth.
In his first three months at Tekmar, Richard has 
already made significant strides in planning 
and executing Project Aurora, a transformative 
three-year plan to double revenue, expand into 
key markets, and position Tekmar for long-term 
success. His vision and expertise are guiding 
the business toward its ambitious goals, 
building on Tekmar’s strong foundations. 
We sat down with Richard to learn more about 
his journey, his leadership approach, and his 
plans for Tekmar’s future. 
Q&A with Richard Turner: Tekmar Group’s 
CEO 
Q: What attracted you to Tekmar Group? 
Richard Turner: Tekmar’s reputation speaks 
for itself. With over 40 years of experience in 
the offshore energy sector, the company has 
a proven track record of delivering innovative 
solutions. 
From 
over 
100,000 
subsea 
stabilisation products in service to 10,000 
Cable Protection Systems supplied across 25 
countries, the breadth and depth of Tekmar’s 
accomplishments are truly impressive. What 
really drew me in, though, was the opportunity 
to work with such a talented team and to lead 
the business at this pivotal time, with Project 
Aurora setting a clear path for growth and 
transformation.
Q: Can you tell us about your career journey 
before joining Tekmar? 
Richard Turner: My professional journey 
started in 2000 with Komatsu and later 
Terex, where I spent significant time in Japan 
and the USA. Those early years gave me a 
deep understanding of Lean and Six Sigma 
principles, supply chain management, and 
large-scale product development. 
In 2009, I joined Technip, where I led 
global deployment of the Lean Production 
System, implemented a major safety culture 
transformation program, and delivered large 
capital expenditure projects in global facilities. 
In 2014, I became President & CEO of JDR 
Cables ltd, where I helped position the 
company as an early mover into offshore 
wind cables. During my tenure, we built major 
factories, drove a fourfold increase in order 
intake, and completed the sale of the business 
to a trade buyer. 
From 2019, as CEO of BEL Valves, I led a 
significant restructuring effort, rebuilding 
customer relationships, and developing a 
spares and O&M business, turning a £(10)m 
EBITDA loss into EBITDA profit of £3m. 
Most recently, I served as CEO of Geoquip 
Marine. There, I spearheaded a major 
restructuring, launched operational excellence 
programs, 
and 
achieved 
a 
remarkable 
turnaround—improving EBITDA loss from $(3)
m to EBITDA profit of $27m in just 15 months, 
all while devising a 10-year strategy to reach 
$100m EBITDA. 
Get to Know 
Tekmar’s CEO, 
Richard Turner

www.tekmargroup.com
66
www.tekmargroup.com
67
www.tekmargroup.com
Each of these experiences has shaped my 
approach to leadership and transformation, 
and I’m excited to bring these lessons to 
Tekmar.
Q: Why did you choose to join Tekmar at this 
stage in your career? 
Richard Turner: I saw Tekmar as a company 
with a rich legacy and immense potential. The 
offshore energy market is evolving rapidly, 
and Tekmar has the experience, technology, 
and talent to not just participate in this 
evolution but lead it. With Project Aurora, 
we’re focused on growth, diversification, and 
innovation—aligning perfectly with my career-
long passion for driving change and building 
sustainable businesses. 
Q: What excites you most about Tekmar’s 
future? 
Richard Turner: The energy transition is the 
defining challenge of our time, and offshore 
wind is at the heart of that shift. Tekmar is 
perfectly positioned to capitalise on this 
opportunity, especially as new technologies 
like floating wind farms gain traction and 
global markets expand. What excites me 
most is our potential to lead this change—not 
just through innovation but by being a trusted 
partner for our customers as they navigate 
these transformative times. With our strong 
foundations and ambitious vision, I believe 
Tekmar is poised to shape the future of 
offshore energy. 
Q: How has your perspective on Tekmar evolved 
after three months in the role? 
Richard Turner: My initial impressions of 
Tekmar were incredibly positive, but after 
three months, I’m even more impressed. 
Our track record—spanning 40 years—is 
phenomenal, and the dedication of our 
team is unmatched. The financial stability 
we’ve achieved, the clarity of our strategy 
through Project Aurora, and the appetite for 
innovation within the company all reinforce 
my confidence that Tekmar is on the right 
path.
Q: How do you plan to lead Tekmar in this next 
chapter? 
Richard Turner: My focus is on leveraging 
our strengths—our heritage, technology, and 
financial platform—to deliver sustainable 
growth. We have clear goals under Project 
Aurora, including doubling our revenue and 
achieving mid to high teens EBITDA margins. 
To get there, we’ll invest strategically in 
innovation, 
operational 
excellence, 
and 
market diversification. Leadership is about 
empowering people, and I’m committed to 
creating an environment where our team can 
thrive and deliver exceptional results for our 
customers and shareholders. 
Q: What message do you have for Tekmar’s 
customers and shareholders? 
Richard Turner: For our customers, my 
message is that Tekmar is here to solve your 
challenges and deliver the solutions you need 
to succeed. For our shareholders, I want 
to assure you that we have a clear plan for 
sustainable growth. With our proven track 
record, strong financial foundations, and 
Project Aurora guiding our future, Tekmar is 
well-positioned to create significant value 
and deliver on our commitments. 
Richard Turner’s extensive 
experience and transformational 
leadership are driving Tekmar 
toward a new phase of growth, 
innovation, and market leadership. 
His focus on leveraging Tekmar’s 
strong foundations and embracing 
future opportunities ensures that 
the company will continue to lead in 
the global offshore energy sector.

www.tekmargroup.com
68
www.tekmargroup.com
69
www.tekmargroup.com
Our Mission: Innovating for the Global Offshore 
Energy Market 
To fulfil our vision, we are guided by our mission: to 
provide innovative engineering solutions and products 
for the global offshore energy market. This mission 
reflects our technical expertise, our commitment 
to solving complex challenges, and our focus on 
delivering value to clients around the world. 
Innovation is at the core of what we do. As the offshore 
energy sector evolves, so too do the demands for 
robust and efficient solutions. Our engineering and 
geotechnical services, combined with our advanced 
subsea products, provide clients with the tools they 
need to succeed in a competitive and fast-changing 
industry. 
Our 100,000 subsea stabilisation products, currently in 
service, are a testament to our ability to deliver solutions 
that stand the test of time. These products, alongside 
our cable protection systems and engineering 
expertise, ensure that our clients’ offshore assets are 
safeguarded in the most challenging environments. 
Global reach is another cornerstone of our mission. 
With projects in over 120 locations worldwide, Tekmar 
is a trusted partner for offshore energy developers 
across continents. By combining local insights with 
global expertise, we deliver solutions that are tailored, 
effective, and forward-looking. 
Our Values: The Heart of Tekmar’s Culture 
At the heart of Tekmar are our values: work together, 
do things right, and break the boundaries. These 
principles define our culture, guide our decision-
making, and influence how we engage with our clients, 
partners, and colleagues. 
Work Together: Collaboration is essential to our 
success. At Tekmar, we believe that by working 
together, we can achieve more—both as a team and 
with our clients and partners. This spirit of collaboration 
fosters innovation, ensures seamless delivery, and 
builds strong relationships that stand the test of time. 
Do Things Right: Integrity and excellence are non-
negotiable. 
Whether 
it’s 
delivering 
high-quality 
subsea stabilisation products, performing meticulous 
geotechnical 
designs, 
or 
conducting 
thorough 
analysis, we are committed to doing things the right 
way. By adhering to the highest standards of safety, 
quality, and sustainability, we maintain the trust and 
confidence of our stakeholders. 
Break the Boundaries: Innovation means pushing 
limits. At Tekmar, we encourage our people to think 
differently, embrace challenges, and explore new 
possibilities. Breaking boundaries is about more than 
technological advancements; it’s about finding better, 
smarter, and more sustainable ways to serve our 
clients and contribute to the offshore energy market. 
Living Our Principles Every Day 
Bringing our vision, mission, and values to life is an 
ongoing journey that involves every aspect of our 
organisation. It’s evident in the way we design and 
deliver our products, the relationships we build with our 
clients, and the contributions we make to the offshore 
energy industry. 
At Tekmar, we are not just meeting the demands 
of today’s energy market; we are shaping its 
future. By working together, doing things right, and 
breaking the boundaries, we are enabling the energy 
transition and building a legacy that we—and future 
generations—can be proud of. 
We invite you to join us on this 
journey as we continue to innovate, 
collaborate, and deliver for a better 
tomorrow.
Vision, Mission and 
Values
Bringing Our Vision, Mission, and Values to 
Life at Tekmar Group 
At Tekmar Group, we are proud to share the 
guiding principles that define who we are and 
what we do: our vision, mission, and values. 
These principles are not just statements—
they are the foundation of our organisation, 
shaping our strategy, culture, and day-to-day 
operations. Whether you are new to Tekmar or 
already familiar with our work, we are excited 
to show how we bring these principles to 
life, creating meaningful impact in the global 
offshore energy market. 
Our Vision: A Responsibility to Future 
Generations 
Our vision is both ambitious and purpose-
driven: 
to 
enable 
the 
world’s 
energy 
transition, reflecting our responsibility to 
future generations. This encapsulates our 
commitment to addressing one of the world’s 
most pressing challenges—climate change—
by supporting the transition to renewable 
energy sources.
At 
Tekmar, 
we 
don’t 
just 
talk 
about 
sustainability; we deliver tangible results. 
We have already safeguarded over 40GW of 
offshore energy capacity and supplied over 
10,000 cable protection systems across more 
than 120 projects worldwide. These solutions 
play a crucial role in the reliability and longevity 
of offshore wind and tidal energy projects, 
ensuring they perform optimally for decades. 
Our commitment extends beyond products 
to include world-class expertise. We have 
delivered over 180,000 hours of analysis and 
more than 160,000 hours of geotechnical 
design, helping clients optimise their projects 
for performance, safety, and sustainability. 
Additionally, 
with 
over 
100,000 
subsea 
stabilisation products in active service, we are 
making a measurable impact on the global 
offshore energy infrastructure. 
Our vision is a call to action for 
every member of the Tekmar 
team, driving us to innovate, 
collaborate, and lead in the 
transition to a cleaner, greener 
future. 

www.tekmargroup.com
70
www.tekmargroup.com
71
www.tekmargroup.com
The Board is focussed on effective strategy 
development and deployment to ensure 
the long-term sustainable success of the 
Group, generating value for shareholders 
whilst managing risk.  We adhere to the QCA 
Code in support of this and demonstrate our 
commitment to all stakeholders, including 
shareholders, with a description of how we 
apply the ten governance principles is provided 
below. 
Principle 1. Establish a strategy and a 
business model that promote long-term 
value for shareholders 
The Board has a clear strategy for delivering 
long-term shareholder value. Our ambition is 
to: 
Create greater scale, resilience and return on 
capital by; 
•	
Doubling Tekmar’s revenue within 3-5 
years 
through 
organic 
growth 
and 
complement this growth through targeted 
M&A
•	
Delivering 
EBITDA 
growth 
that 
out 
performs revenue growth 
•	
Further underpinning Tekmar’s technology 
leadership position within the offshore 
energy industry
•	
Diversifying Tekmar’s offering, expanding 
service 
revenues 
and 
expanding 
geographical reach to capitalise on 
expanding global offshore energy markets 
•	
Creating 
a 
diverse 
and 
dynamic 
environment that provides our people with 
the platform to drive success and to grow 
with our business 
The key focus areas within our growth strategy: 
•	
Organic Growth – Capitalising on our 
industry pedigree and improving market 
conditions to  significantly expand our 
orderbook  to support sustainable revenue 
growth 
•	
Utilising existing capacity and benefiting 
from operational gearing to as well as 
continuously improving our operational 
efficiency and commercial discipline to 
deliver higher % profits and positive cash 
generation 
•	
Sustainable business – target ongoing 
business improvement, underpinned by 
our People Strategy and our ESG Strategy 
•	
Invest strategically in businesses and 
technology  that further reinforce our 
position as a complete subsea systems 
solutions provider 
Our organic & acquisitive strategic pillars are 
deployable in parallel as Tekmar benefits from 
its position on the public markets and has the 
additional flexibility of the £18m Convertible 
Loan Note facility with major shareholder 
SCF Partners. This will enable us to realise 
our growth potential more quickly and to 
outperform our markets maximising returns 
and shareholder value.
Goverance
Message from the 
Chairman
We have developed our corporate governance 
processes in line with practices appropriate to 
the size of the Group to ensure good business 
conduct and culture.  We seek to drive the right 
values and behaviours throughout the Group 
and ensure the Board remains visible and 
accountable.
Our corporate governance covers the way 
that we behave with each other and how 
we interact with our wider stakeholders – 
including customers, suppliers, shareholders, 
employees and the communities around us. 
We have provided more detail on these areas 
in our Sustainability Report and in other areas 
of this report.  We strive to create a culture at 
Tekmar based on the highest ethical standards 
as this is fundamental to the Group’s success.
The Directors acknowledge the value of high 
standards of corporate governance and 
adopt and comply with the QCA Corporate 
Governance Code which is an effective and 
flexible governance model for the Group. Our 
Corporate Governance Statement (overleaf 
and on our website) provides more detail.  
In delivering our strategic growth ambitions 
it is important that the Board composition 
provides a balance of experience and healthy 
challenge to the Executive team.  I believe that 
the different experiences and backgrounds 
of the Board brings a suitable range of 
skills in light of the Group’s challenges 
and opportunities.  At the same time, the 
composition of the Board ensures that no 
individual (or a small Group of individuals) can 
dominate the Board’s decision-making. The 
Board meets regularly to formulate, approve 
and review progress against the Group’s 
strategy, budgets, corporate actions and goals. 
The Board delegates some duties and 
responsibilities to representative committees, 
Audit, Remuneration and Nomination, each 
having agreed terms of reference and a 
process for making recommendations to the 
Board.  Details of the activities for each of the 
committees are included in this governance 
section of the Annual Report. 
The Executive Team have the appropriate 
delegated authorities from the Board to ensure 
the right decision-making takes place across 
the business and that the right controls are 
embedded into these processes.  They are 
responsible for the day-to-day management 
of the Group and driving the execution of our 
strategy. 
This next section of the Annual Report covers 
our corporate governance and how it operates 
for the Group. I hope it provides the detail 
you require and am always happy to receive 
feedback from our stakeholders in this regard.
Corporate Governance 
Statement 

www.tekmargroup.com
72
www.tekmargroup.com
73
www.tekmargroup.com
Principle 
4. 
Embed 
effective 
risk 
management, considering both opportunities 
and threats, throughout the organisation 
The Board has overall responsibility for the 
determination of the Group’s risk management 
objectives and policies, as well as the Group’s 
risk appetite. This risk management is 
included in and reviewed as part of our annual 
business plan and Strategic Review.  Operating 
in the offshore energy sector, managing risk is 
fundamental to our everyday responsibilities 
and our policies, procedures and behaviours 
are continuously reviewed to ensure these are 
appropriate. 
The Board aims to set policies that provide 
a balance between reducing risk as far as 
possible, without unduly impacting the Group’s 
competitiveness and flexibility. The Board 
believes this helps to sustain stakeholder value; 
including the Group’s supply chain through to 
the end-customer; while also protecting the 
Group’s established corporate culture. 
A breakdown of the Company’s key risk factors 
can be found in the Risk Management report. 
Risk management, including financial and 
non-financial controls; what the Board does to 
identify, assess and manage risk and how it 
obtains assurance that our risk management 
and control systems are operating effectively, 
is covered by the Group’s business risk 
assessment procedures. 
Principle 5. Maintain the Board as a well-
functioning, balanced team led by the Chair 
The Directors recognise the importance of 
high standards of corporate governance and 
believe the QCA Code provides the most 
appropriate guidance for the Group by setting 
out a standard best practice for small and 
mid-size 
quoted 
companies, 
particularly 
those listed on AIM. The Chairman maintains 
overall responsibility for ensuring the Group’s 
compliance with the QCA Code.  The Non-
Executive Directors share responsibility for the 
effective running of the Board’s committees 
which comprise an important element of the 
governance process. 
In line with QCA guidance, three of the Non-
Executive Directors are independent. The 
Non-Executive Directors of the Board have 
been selected with the desire to increase 
the breadth of skills and experience of the 
Board and bring constructive challenge to the 
Executive Directors.  
The Company Directors are: 
•	
Steve Lockard, Non-Executive Chairman 
•	
David Wilkinson, Senior Independent 
Non-Executive Director 
•	
Richard Turner, Chief Executive Officer 
•	
Leanne Wilkinson, Chief Financial Officer 
•	
Colin Welsh, Non-Executive Director 
•	
David Kemp, Non-Executive Director 
•	
Lars Bondo Krogsgaard, Non-Executive 
Director 
The 
Group 
has 
determined 
that 
the 
composition of the Board and its committees 
brings a desirable portfolio of skills, personal 
qualities and experience for delivering our 
strategy, based upon the size and nature of 
the business. 
All Directors are subject to re-election 
by shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting within a three-year period of their 
appointment. Any Directors appointed during 
the financial year must be formally elected at 
the Annual General Meeting following their 
appointment.
Further incremental investments will support 
growth and be self-funded where possible, 
to protect the business and shareholder 
interests.  We will manage risk closely to 
limit any potential adverse effects in the 
implementation of our strategy. We do this by 
ensuring that we have a framework in place 
to identify and monitor risk and uncertainty 
in line with our business risk assessment 
procedures.
Principle 2. Seek to understand and meet 
shareholder needs and expectations 
We are dedicated to communicating clearly 
and openly with shareholders to ensure that 
our strategy, business model and performance 
are clearly understood. 
Understanding what analysts and investors 
think about us, including the factors which 
drive their investment decisions towards us, 
and helping our stakeholders understand our 
business, is a key component in driving our 
business forward. 
Maintaining regular and positive engagement 
with shareholders is a priority. Our primary 
methods of communication are through 
the Annual Report; interim and full-year 
results announcements; the Annual General 
Meeting and other information shared on 
the Group’s investor website. We will also 
continue to carry out investor roadshows at 
significant times throughout the year, attend 
investor conferences and a commitment to 
host investors at Tekmar’s facilities where 
appropriate.  The Company also seeks 
improved levels of communication with a 
bolstered financial PR and Investor Relations 
function and the use of the Investor Meet 
Company platform. Information in relation 
to the Company, garnered from these 
engagements will be relayed back to the Board 
by the CEO and CFO, to ensure the concerns of 
shareholders are promptly addressed 
If and when voting decisions at AGMs or 
General Meetings deviate from the Company’s 
expectations, the Board will communicate 
with shareholders to understand and address 
any issues informing those decisions. 
Requests for information on any of these 
matters, including details of investor days, can 
be made to investors@tekmar.co.uk.  Note: no 
unpublished price sensitive information will 
be provided by this email address. All Tekmar 
Group plc communications will align and 
accord with official AIM guidelines. 
Principle 3. Take into account wider 
stakeholder and social responsibilities, and 
implications for longer term success 
The Board strives to create a socially and 
ethically responsible business and has 
developed an ESG Strategy to formalise 
our alignment to the UN Sustainable 
Development Goals.  The Executive Team 
maintain oversight over the delivery of this 
strategy going forward including delivery 
against targeted improvements. 
The Board appreciates the need to maintain 
effective working relationships across a wide 
range of stakeholders, including investors, 
employees, partners and local communities. 
Our ESG Strategy will continue to evolve 
as we respond to feedback from our wider 
stakeholders and actions taken as a result 
seen as an essential part of ensuring long 
term success.
Our 
operational 
processes 
are 
also 
externally audited and reflected by the 
ISO accreditations within our subsidiary 
businesses.  Our commitment to these areas 
is shown through their inclusion in our annual 
strategic planning process, including a SWOT 
analysis, and thus they are embedded into the 
Group’s strategy and business model.
Corporate Goverance Statement continued

www.tekmargroup.com
74
www.tekmargroup.com
75
www.tekmargroup.com
Each of the Directors are active in the energy 
sector and continually refine and improve 
their knowledge of the latest techniques and 
strategies in order to ensure they are adding 
maximum value to the Board. 
For acquisition activity we use a range of 
professional advisors to protect and enhance 
the Group’s position as it delivers on its 
strategy. 
Principle 7. Evaluate Board performance 
based upon clear objectives and reassess 
continuously 
The Board has an annual process for the 
performance appraisal of its members, the 
scope of which includes skills, experience and 
capabilities, and incorporates consideration 
of additional responsibilities such as chairing 
or membership of the Board committees. 
The annual appraisal is carried out by the 
Chairman with regards to the competencies 
and responsibilities set out by the Nomination 
Committee pursuant to each Board role. As 
part of this process, any training and personal 
development needs will be identified and a 
plan formulated to ensure these are met over 
an appropriate timeframe. 
The 
Chairman’s 
performance 
is 
also 
appraised through a process managed by 
a Chairman Appraisal Group, comprising 
the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief 
Financial Officer. 
The responsibilities of the Board are to 
review, formulate and approve the Group’s 
strategy, budgets and corporate activities, 
and to oversee the Group’s progress towards 
its goals. The Group has a defined process 
for evaluating the performance of the Board, 
its committees and the individual Directors, 
including the Chairman, in respect of these 
objectives. 
The Board carries out an evaluation of its 
performance 
regularly, 
covering 
Board 
composition 
and 
skills, 
strategy 
and 
performance, governance and organisation, 
Board dynamics, and communication with 
shareholders and other key stakeholders. 
This evaluation is based upon the self-
assessment of the Chairman and Directors. 
If deemed necessary, an external adviser may 
be brought in to support with the evaluation. 
The Nomination Committee may use the 
output of the evaluation process when 
evaluating the composition of the Board 
for selecting new Board members, and in 
succession planning for the Directors of 
the Board as well as key executive team 
members.
Principle 8. Promote a culture which is based 
on ethical values and behaviours 
We have a clear vision and values. Our values 
are: 
•	
Work Together - We foster teamwork 
without boundaries, to ensure the best 
results are delivered in an environment 
where people feel empowered, safe, 
trusted, confident and inspired to develop. 
•	
Do Things Right - We take a united 
approach towards Safety, Quality and 
Delivery. We lead by example and 
constantly find ways to raise standards. 
We challenge the norm and have courage 
to stand up for what is right.  
•	
Break the boundaries - We collaborate 
with our customers and constantly look 
for ways to develop our technology and 
services to make today’s impossible 
tomorrow’s deliverable.
It is considered that the composition of the 
Board is appropriate for the Group’s current 
size and structure and supports our strategic 
aims. This is reviewed on an annual basis.  The 
Group believes that the successful functioning 
and effectiveness of the Board is predicated 
upon a number of key factors, in addition to its 
composition. These are: 
•	
Operations – the agenda and frequency of 
meetings, and monitoring of attendance; 
•	
Access 
to 
appropriate 
advice 
and 
administrative 
services 
– 
via 
both 
the Company Secretary and external 
resources, as required; 
•	
Detailed induction of new Directors to the 
Board and its committees; and 
•	
Regular 
assessment 
of 
Board 
performance – both as a unit and of its 
members individually. 
Both the Chairman and the other members 
of the Board hold these factors in the highest 
regard and are dedicated to performing 
ongoing evaluation to evaluate how they are 
applied in practice. 
The time commitments of the Non-Executive 
Directors are as follows: 
•	
Steve Lockard minimum time commitment 
of four days per month. 
•	
David 
Wilkinson 
minimum 
time 
commitment of three or four days per 
month. 
•	
Colin Welsh minimum time commitment 
of two days per month. 
•	
David Kemp minimum time commitment 
of two or three days per month. 
•	
Lars Bondo Krogsgaard minimum time 
commitment of two or three days per 
month. 
Principle 6. Ensure that between them, the 
Directors have the necessary up-to-date 
skills, experience and capability 
The Board is confident that its members have 
an appropriate balance of backgrounds, skills 
and knowledge in order to deliver on its core 
objectives. The members of the Board have 
particular experience in offshore energy; 
engineering; manufacturing; operations and 
finance, covering both private and public 
companies.  
Linked to the strategic investment in April 
2023, Colin Welsh and Steve Lockard joined 
the Board as representatives of SCF.  Colin 
is a Partner of SCF with global energy sector 
experience and experience as an advisor and 
investor.  Steve is an Operating Partner within 
SCF and has over 35 years’ experience in 
global operations and executive leadership. 
In August 2024, in light of Ian Ritchey and 
Julian Brown stepping down from the Board, 
the Group announced the appointment of two 
Non-Executive Directors, David Kemp and Lars 
Bondo Krogsgaard.  David is an accomplished 
and experience FTSE 250 CFO with a strong 
track record leading diverse global teams. 
Before joining Tekmar, David was the CFO at 
John Wood plc.  Lars brings considerable wind 
industry experience and an extensive track 
record leading global organisations for over 
20 years, including publicly listed companies. 
The Nomination Committee is responsible 
for overseeing the selection of Board 
members that possess an appropriate range 
of experience, knowledge, integrity and 
ethics. Throughout the year, the Directors can 
access advice and services of independent 
professional advisors, at the expense of the 
Company. 
Corporate Goverance Statement continued

www.tekmargroup.com
76
www.tekmargroup.com
77
www.tekmargroup.com
The Board advocates ethical responsibility and good 
conduct within the Group, encouraging a culture 
of inclusion, responsibility and openness which is 
consistent with the Group’s objectives. We constantly 
strive to actively promote a proactive attitude towards 
HSQE by all stakeholders and we have a safety-first 
approach in everything we do.  
The Group is an equal opportunities employer and 
actively encourages diversity at all levels. These 
values are embedded in the Group’s leadership and 
throughout the organisation. 
Principle 9. Maintain governance structures and 
processes that are fit for purpose and support good 
decision making by the Board 
Quality underpins everything we do. Within the offshore 
energy industry, standards and the protection of those 
standards are paramount and something which the 
Tekmar Board has a wealth of experience in. Our 
independently audited quality management systems 
and ISO accreditations demonstrate our commitment 
in this area. 
The 
Group 
operates 
an 
effective 
governance 
framework. 
Within 
this 
framework 
the 
Board 
encourages and challenges the Executive Team in 
developing and delivering the Group’s strategy. An 
open and constructive dialogue is entered into before 
decisions within these governance structures are 
concluded. 
The Chairman leads the Board and takes responsibility 
for its governance structures, performance and 
effectiveness. This includes ensuring that the 
dynamics of the Board are functional and productive, 
and that deliberations and discussions are not 
dominated by any individual member. The Chairman 
is also responsible for ensuring that links between 
the Board and the Executive Team and the Board and 
shareholders, are strong and effective. Meanwhile, the 
Chief Executive Officer takes responsibility for the day-
to-day management of the Group’s operations and for 
delivering the strategic goals agreed by the Board. 
The Board maintains an agenda of regular financial and 
operational matters for discussion, as well as reviewing 
each committee’s area of work. The Board takes 
ultimate responsibility for making any key strategic or 
business decisions. Members of the Executive Team 
are invited to attend appropriate portions of meetings 
of the Board in order to facilitate these processes. 
In other instances, the Chief Executive Officer 
communicates their relevant views and information to 
the rest of the Board. 
The effectiveness of the corporate governance 
structures and processes is formally assessed as part 
of the annual Board evaluation. 
Principle 10. Communicate how the company is 
governed and performing by maintaining a dialogue 
with shareholders and other relevant stakeholders 
We are committed to communicating openly with 
our shareholders to ensure our strategy, business 
model and performance are all clearly understood. 
Understanding what key stakeholders think about us, 
including the drivers behind their investment decisions, 
is a key part of developing our business. We also 
maintain a strong focus on ensuring our stakeholders 
understand our business.   
The principal methods of communication with 
shareholders are the Annual Report, the interim and 
full-year results announcements, the Annual General 
Meeting and other announcements as and when 
applicable on the Group’s investor website.  In support 
of this communication the company meets at least bi-
annually with institutional investors and also utilises 
the Investor Meets Company platform at relevant 
points during the year to address the retail investor 
community.  Where possible, we proactively support 
investor roadshows at key dates throughout the 
year, attend investor conferences and host site visits 
to Tekmar premises, including ad-hoc meetings by 
exception. 
The website is updated regularly with information 
regarding developments across the Group, and users 
can register to receive email alerts regarding new 
announcements, reports and events, including Annual 
General Meetings.
Corporate Goverance Statement continued
The Board
Steve Lockard 
Chair and Non-Executive Director 
Steve Lockard was appointed Chair of Tekmar Group 
in 2024, having joined the Board in 2023 following 
investment from SCF Partners. With 40 years of 
global operations leadership experience, Steve 
brings invaluable expertise in renewable energy and 
company platform building. In addition to his role at 
Tekmar, Steve is an operating partner and supports 
energy transition investments and company platform 
building for SCF. 
Steve is the former CEO and current Chairman of TPI 
Composites (NASDAQ: TPIC), where he transformed 
the business into the world’s largest independent 
wind blade manufacturer, driving significant growth 
in the global offshore and onshore wind sectors. 
He brings extensive board experience from roles at 
D2Zero and leadership positions with the American 
Wind Energy Association (AWEA) and the American 
Clean Power Association (ACP). 
Steve’s strategic guidance and deep industry 
expertise position him to help drive Tekmar’s growth 
and leadership in offshore wind and energy transition 
markets. Based in Arizona, Steve enjoys golf, skiing, 
and spending time with his family. 
Richard Turner 
Chief Executive Officer 
Richard Turner joined Tekmar Group as CEO in 2024, 
bringing extensive leadership experience in the 
offshore energy sector, including offshore wind, oil 
and gas, and renewables. With a strong track record of 
driving transformational growth, Richard has delivered 
significant value through strategic vision, operational 
excellence, and commercial acumen in his previous 
roles. 
Richard joined Tekmar from Geoquip Marine, where 
he served as CEO. During his tenure, he developed 
and executed a clear strategy that delivered 
substantial revenue and EBITDA growth in just 12 
months. This was achieved through restructuring the 
business, enhancing operational performance, and 
implementing new front-end processes to rebalance 
risk. 
Prior to Geoquip, Richard was CEO of BEL Valves, 
where he successfully led a significant rightsizing 
program, rebuilt key customer relationships, and 
developed a spares and O&M business, turning a 
£(10)m EBITDA loss into a £3m profit. At JDR Cable 
Systems, as President and CEO, Richard positioned 
the company as an early mover in offshore wind 
cables, delivering a fourfold increase in order intake 
and overseeing major factory builds while driving the 
successful sale of the business to a trade buyer. 

www.tekmargroup.com
78
www.tekmargroup.com
79
www.tekmargroup.com
The Board continued
Leanne Wilkinson 
Chief Financial Officer 
Leanne Wilkinson became Chief Financial Officer 
and an Executive Director of the Board in June 2023, 
following her tenure as Group Finance Director. Leanne 
joined Tekmar in July 2020 as Tekmar Energy Finance 
Director before progressing to senior leadership roles 
within the Group. 
A CIMA-qualified accountant with over 20 years of 
experience as a senior finance professional and 
business leader, Leanne brings extensive expertise 
in business change, transformation, and integration, 
gained from her work in the manufacturing and 
technology sectors. 
Leanne has played a pivotal role in Tekmar’s success, 
co-leading the investment process with SCF and 
driving key fundraising activities to strengthen the 
Group’s financial platform. As Chair of the ESG 
Committee, Leanne oversees Tekmar’s commitment 
to sustainability and its environmental, social, and 
governance strategy. Her leadership was integral to 
Tekmar’s return towards profitability in 2024, where 
she focused on operational improvements and 
financial discipline to deliver sustainable growth. 
Leanne’s strategic vision and deep understanding of 
Tekmar’s business position her as a critical leader in 
executing the Group’s transformative Project Aurora 
strategy. 
Alasdair MacDonald 
Executive Director (Resigned February 2025) 
Alasdair (“Ally”) MacDonald has over 30 years of 
experience in the offshore energy sector, bringing 
deep industry expertise and strategic leadership to 
Tekmar Group. An engineer by trade, Ally holds an 
honours degree in mechanical engineering and has 
built a distinguished career in senior executive roles 
across the sector. 
Ally spent 19 years with Technip UK Limited, a global 
engineering and construction company, where he 
held a number of senior leadership roles, including 
Managing Director of Technip Umbilicals Limited from 
2005 to 2008, a leader in its global markets. He later 
joined Wellstream Holdings plc, a FTSE 250 designer, 
manufacturer, and supplier of flexible pipeline 
products to the offshore oil and gas industry, where 
he held senior executive positions and contributed 
to the company’s growth and operational success. 
Ally has also served as a Director for several privately 
funded businesses, further broadening his leadership 
experience. 
Having served as Tekmar Group’s CEO, Ally stepped 
down in 2024 and continued as a member of the 
Board as an Executive Director until January 2025. 
His extensive industry knowledge and engineering 
expertise continued to play a vital role in supporting 
Tekmar’s strategic direction. 
David Wilkinson  
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director  
David is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants and holds the ICAEW’s Corporate 
Finance qualification. He was a Partner at Deloitte 
for almost 30 years, initially being responsible for 
Corporate Finance advisory and transaction support 
work, but later in his career undertook audits as the 
Responsible Individual for large private companies 
and plcs within a diverse range of industries, including 
the technology, manufacturing, and engineering 
sectors. In recent years, David has taken up several 
Non-Executive Director roles in Technology and 
engineering companies. 
Colin Welsh 
Non-Executive Director 
Colin Welsh joined the Board of Tekmar Group as 
a Non-Executive Director in 2023, following the 
investment from SCF Partners. As a Partner at 
SCF Partners, Colin brings extensive experience 
in international energy investment banking and 
corporate finance, contributing valuable strategic 
insights to the Group. 
Prior to joining SCF Partners in 2017, Colin served 
as Chief Executive Officer and Head of International 
Energy Investment Banking at Simmons & Company 
International. Joining Simmons in 1999, he was 
instrumental in expanding the firm’s activities outside 
North America, establishing offices in Aberdeen, 
London, and Dubai. Under his leadership, Simmons 
& 
Company 
International 
grew 
significantly, 
culminating in its sale to Piper Jaffray (NYSE: PJC) 
in February 2016. 
A Scottish Chartered Accountant, Colin has over 
30 years of experience in the energy sector. Before 
his tenure at Simmons & Company, he spent 16 
years with Ernst & Whinney, Touche Ross, and RMD, 
where he gained extensive experience in accounting, 
auditing, and financial advisory services. 
Colin’s deep understanding of the global energy 
market and his expertise in strategic growth and 
investment align with Tekmar’s ambitions. His 
involvement strengthens the Board’s capacity to 
drive Tekmar’s expansion and deliver long-term value 
to shareholders. 

www.tekmargroup.com
80
www.tekmargroup.com
81
www.tekmargroup.com
The Board continued
Lars Bondo Krogsgaard 
Non-Executive Director 
Lars Bondo Krogsgaard joined the Board of Tekmar 
Group as a Non-Executive Director in 2024, bringing 
over 20 years of leadership experience in the global 
wind industry. Lars has an extensive track record of 
leading publicly listed companies and driving growth 
across wind turbine manufacturing, renewable energy 
project development, and supply chain activities. 
Previously, Lars served as Onshore CEO at Siemens 
Gamesa Renewable Energy, a leading global wind 
turbine manufacturer with revenues of approximately 
€10.2 billion. Before his role at Siemens Gamesa, Lars 
was Co-CEO at MHI Vestas Offshore Wind, where 
he played a pivotal role in advancing offshore wind 
technology and market growth. He also served as a 
member of the Management Board and CEO of Nordex, 
a publicly listed German wind turbine manufacturer, 
where he oversaw significant organisational and 
market expansions. 
Lars’ deep industry knowledge, operational expertise, 
and proven leadership in the renewable energy sector 
make him an invaluable member of Tekmar’s Board. 
His experience aligns with Tekmar’s strategic focus 
on the offshore wind market and supports the Group’s 
ambitions. 
David Kemp 
Non-Executive Director 
David Kemp joined the Board of Tekmar Group as a 
Non-Executive Director in 2024, bringing extensive 
financial and strategic leadership experience from 
a distinguished career in FTSE 250 companies and 
global organisations. 
Most recently, David served as Group CFO at 
John Wood Group Plc (“Wood Group”), a global 
engineering and consulting company with over 
35,000 professionals across 60 countries and 
revenues of approximately US$6 billion. During his 
decade-long tenure, David played a key leadership 
role in transforming Wood Group from an oil and gas-
dominated, unintegrated organisation into a global, 
multi-sector engineering and consultancy business. 
His responsibilities included extensive capital raising, 
where he oversaw over US$4 billion in public and 
private markets, as well as executing over US$3 billion 
of strategic acquisitions. 
Prior to Wood Group, David served as Group CFO of 
Jersey Oil and Gas plc, an AIM-quoted exploration 
company, where he was responsible for driving 
financial and operational performance. 
David’s proven expertise in strategy development 
and execution, business transformation, and M&A 
aligns closely with Tekmar’s ambitions. His deep 
understanding of capital markets and experience 
leading diverse global teams make him a key 
contributor to the Board as Tekmar accelerates its 
growth and transformation agenda. 
Key Management
Fraser Gibson 
Managing Director of RYDER 
Fraser Gibson is the Managing Director of RYDER, Tekmar 
Group’s global engineering powerhouse formed in 2024 
through the merger of Ryder Geotechnical and AgileTek 
Engineering. A Chartered Engineer with the Institution of 
Civil Engineers, Fraser brings over 16 years of experience 
as a geotechnical engineering consultant in the offshore 
sector. 
Fraser began his career at UTEC Geomarine, where he 
progressed from Senior Engineer to Principal Engineer 
and later Regional Manager for APAC. During his time 
in Singapore, Fraser successfully established an office 
for UTEC Geomarine in the region, further expanding its 
presence in the Asia-Pacific market. 
In 2016, Fraser founded Ryder Geotechnical to provide 
specialist 
geotechnical 
consultancy 
services 
to 
the offshore energy industry. Under his leadership, 
the company built a strong reputation for technical 
excellence, contributing to Tekmar Group’s unrivalled 
track record of over 340,000 engineering hours delivered. 
Now, as Managing Director of RYDER, Fraser leads a 
multidisciplinary team, combining geotechnical and 
advanced engineering expertise to offer integrated 
solutions to the offshore wind, oil and gas, and marine civil 
engineering markets. 
Fraser’s entrepreneurial spirit, deep technical knowledge, 
and leadership have been instrumental in establishing 
RYDER as a trusted partner for complex offshore projects 
worldwide. 
Marc Bell 
Chief Operations Officer 
Marc Bell was the Managing Director of Tekmar Energy, 
bringing over 25 years of technical and operational 
leadership experience across manufacturing, service, 
and project engineering-focused organisations. A 
Mechanical Engineer with a Master’s in Business 
Management from the University of Durham, Marc 
has spent the past 15 years working within the Global 
Energy Sector, holding key roles in offshore wind and 
subsea industries. 
Before joining Tekmar Energy as Managing Director in 
2021, Marc served as Global Operations Director for 
JDR Cables, Head of Offshore Wind UKI for Siemens 
Gamesa, and Global Manufacturing Manager for 
Technip Umbilicals. In each of these roles, Marc 
demonstrated a strong ability to drive operational 
excellence, deliver complex projects, and embed 
innovative practices within global organisations. 
From January 2025, Marc transitioned to the role 
of Chief Operations Officer, overseeing Pipeshield 
operations in addition to Tekmar Energy. Marc’s focus 
will be on embedding the best practices established 
at Tekmar Energy across RYDER and Pipeshield, 
ensuring operational consistency and continuous 
improvement across the Group. 
Marc’s 
extensive 
experience 
and 
leadership 
capabilities position him to play a pivotal role in driving 
Tekmar Group’s operational excellence as part of its 
Project Aurora strategy. 

www.tekmargroup.com
82
www.tekmargroup.com
83
www.tekmargroup.com
Key Management continued
Tallulah Whitewood-Spedding 
Group Legal Counsel / Company Secretary 
Tallulah Whitewood-Spedding is Tekmar Group’s 
Group Legal Counsel and Company Secretary, bringing 
over a decade of experience in supporting businesses 
and public corporations with complex science and 
engineering projects. She has particular expertise in 
commercial law and intellectual property within the 
offshore, energy services, and defence sectors. 
Prior to joining Tekmar, Tallulah held senior legal roles 
at Siemens and Royal IHC Limited, where she provided 
strategic legal advice and managed high-value 
negotiations. As Head of Legal and Procurement at 
the National Physical Laboratory (NPL Management 
Limited), the United Kingdom’s National Measurement 
Institute, Tallulah gained significant experience in 
leading negotiations, advising on commercial strategy, 
and drafting complex cross-jurisdictional contracts. 
Tallulah also sits on Tekmar’s ESG Committee, where 
she provides key governance and legal expertise 
to support the Group’s environmental, social, and 
governance initiatives. Her strategic approach 
and deep understanding of legal and commercial 
frameworks ensure Tekmar operates with robust 
governance while supporting its global operations and 
long-term objectives. 
Alistair Cutting 
Group Head of Finance 
Alistair Cutting is Tekmar Group’s Head of Finance and 
a member of the Institute of Chartered Accountants 
in England and Wales. With a decade of experience 
in finance, Alistair brings a strong background in 
financial reporting, audit, and the development and 
implementation of financial controls. 
Alistair joined Tekmar Group as Financial Controller 
of the former subsidiary Subsea Innovation Limited 
before progressing to the role of Group Financial 
Controller. His dedication, deep understanding of 
the business, and strong work ethic have been 
instrumental in his promotion to Group Head of 
Finance. 
During his tenure, Alistair has played a pivotal role 
in audits, investment activities, and key account 
reporting. His expertise and attention to detail have 
ensured the Group’s financial processes remain 
robust and transparent, supporting Tekmar’s ongoing 
growth and operational excellence. 
Michael Manning 
Head of Marketing 
Michael Manning is Tekmar Group’s Head of Marketing, 
bringing over a decade of experience in delivering 
impactful marketing strategies across both the 
private and public sectors. With a proven track record 
of driving brand awareness and growth, Michael’s 
passion for design and brand identity has enabled him 
to craft campaigns that resonate with target audiences 
while effectively communicating the unique value 
proposition of Tekmar’s products and services. 
In 2024, Michael transitioned to the role of Head 
of Marketing, where he has led the rebranding and 
repositioning of RYDER, establishing its identity as a 
global engineering powerhouse. As the sole marketing 
professional within the Group, Michael works across 
all subsidiaries, managing key projects such as 
exhibitions, communications, and investor relations. 
Michael also plays a pivotal role in internal 
communications, ensuring clarity and alignment 
across the Group. Additionally, he supports the 
development of strategic marketing plans and lead 
generation initiatives, working closely with sales teams 
to achieve company targets and financial goals. 
Chloe Ainsworth
Group Head of People
Chloe Ainsworth is Tekmar Group’s Head of People, 
playing a pivotal role in driving the company’s growth 
through strategic, people-focused initiatives. With 
a first-class degree and Chartered CIPD (MCIPD) 
status, Chloe is an active member of the North East 
HR community, contributing to its development and 
championing innovative, future-focused practices. 
Chloe’s passion for people science, psychology, and 
business strategy underpins her commitment to 
fostering talent, cultivating a culture of innovation, 
and aligning Tekmar’s people strategy with its 
broader business objectives. Her efforts are 
instrumental in making Tekmar Group an employer 
of choice.
In 2024, Chloe was a key member of the team 
responsible for the successful disposal of Subsea 
Innovation. She also led the TUPE process for 
AgileTek and Ryder, ensuring a smooth transition 
during their integration. Chloe provided critical 
guidance to the Board on complex employee 
relations matters. Additionally, she managed 
international HR complexities in China, Saudi 
Arabia, and the UAE, demonstrating her expertise in 
navigating cross-border workforce challenges.

www.tekmargroup.com
84
www.tekmargroup.com
85
www.tekmargroup.com
Why Invest in Tekmar? 
Our engineering and technical excellence 
sets us apart. 
Tekmar is a leader in offshore protection 
and stabilisation solutions, offering cutting-
edge technologies and expert engineering 
services that underpin some of the most 
challenging projects in the energy and 
marine sectors. 
•	
No one else does what we do: Tekmar 
holds a unique market position, 
delivering innovative solutions that are 
critical to the success of offshore wind, 
oil and gas, and marine civil engineering 
projects. 
•	
Protection and stabilisation 
technologies: We provide advanced 
subsea protection and stabilisation 
solutions, enabling our customers to 
optimise their projects while reducing 
risks, improving safety, and lowering 
costs. 
•	
Engineering services: Tekmar’s expertise 
spans the entire project lifecycle, from 
initial feasibility studies to Operations & 
Maintenance (O&M), delivering tailored 
solutions for offshore wind, oil and gas, 
and marine infrastructure. 
•	
Pioneers and pedigree: With decades 
of experience, Tekmar is a trusted 
partner for developers worldwide, with a 
reputation for innovation, reliability, and 
technical excellence.
Favourable markets support sustained 
demand for Tekmar’s technology 
Tekmar operates at the intersection of 
several high-growth industries, each 
benefitting from strong, long-term market 
fundamentals. 
•	
Offshore wind: As governments and 
industries accelerate towards net 
zero carbon emissions, offshore 
wind is a critical component of the 
energy transition, providing significant 
opportunities for Tekmar’s market-
leading solutions.
•	
Offshore oil and gas: Tekmar’s proven 
technologies and expertise support the 
continued need for secure and reliable 
subsea infrastructure in this vital energy 
market. 
•	
Ports and marine civils: Investment 
in port development and coastal 
infrastructure provides further growth 
opportunities, where Tekmar’s protection 
and stabilisation solutions deliver 
proven benefits in these challenging 
environments.
We are building a durable and successful 
company, “no matter what” the path of 
energy transition 
Tekmar is built to thrive across energy and 
marine sectors, combining innovation and 
resilience to deliver long-term success. 
•	
Refreshed management team: Under 
the leadership of Richard Turner, our 
strengthened management team is 
driving a clear and focused strategy to 
deliver results. 
•	
Results-driven Board: Our Board, with 
its wealth of experience, is committed 
to overseeing disciplined execution and 
delivering value for shareholders. 
Investment Case
“I joined the Board in April 2023, initially as Non-Executive 
Director and was appointed Chair in June 2024.  The period 
of time with which I have been involved with Tekmar has 
strengthened my conviction about the opportunity we have 
to make Tekmar a stand-out offshore energy business – a 
business that delivers exceptional value for customers, 
creates significant value for shareholders and is a rewarding 
and stimulating environment for our colleagues. This is 
what drives us.” 
Steve Lockard, Chair of Tekmar 

www.tekmargroup.com
86
www.tekmargroup.com
87
www.tekmargroup.com
•	
Sound stewards of capital: Tekmar is 
committed to disciplined investment, 
ensuring 
shareholder 
returns 
are 
maximised while maintaining a strong 
financial position. 
•	
Profitable growth and cash generation: Our 
focus is on enhancing EBITDA margins, 
generating free cash flow, and delivering 
sustainable returns on capital employed. 
Our three-year strategic plan supports a 
step-change in Tekmar’s scale and financial 
strength 
Project Aurora is a bold and transformative 
plan that will position Tekmar for growth, 
profitability, and resilience. 
•	
Order book: An expanding order backlog 
across offshore wind, oil and gas, and 
marine civil markets highlights the strength 
of demand for Tekmar’s technologies and 
services. 
•	
Well-run 
business 
with 
capacity: 
Operational discipline and efficient use of 
existing capacity ensure Tekmar is well-
prepared to scale as market opportunities 
grow. 
•	
Operational gearing: Improved utilisation 
rates 
and 
disciplined 
investment 
are 
delivering 
enhanced 
profitability, 
positioning Tekmar for strong financial 
performance over the coming years.
Our ambitious M&A strategy drives additional 
scale and diversification 
Tekmar’s mergers and acquisitions strategy 
complements our organic growth plan by 
targeting 
opportunities 
that 
strengthen 
our market position, broaden our product 
offering, and diversify into new markets and 
geographies. 
•	
Leveraging 
strategic 
capital: 
Our 
partnership with SCF provides access to 
£18m of capital through the Convertible 
Loan Note (CLN), enabling us to execute 
targeted acquisitions. 
•	
Focused approach: The executive team 
has conducted an initial mapping of 
the M&A “universe,” identifying over 40 
potential acquisition targets. These have 
been prioritised against key criteria, 
with further evaluation underway in 
collaboration with the M&A committee. 
Key criteria for acquisitions: 
•	
Positive EBITDA and cash generative 
businesses 
•	
Opportunities for market consolidation 
•	
Complementary products and services 
•	
Expansion into new geographies 
•	
Strengthening offshore services 
•	
Future-facing technology and growth 
potential 
•	
“Brown to green” transition opportunities 
Our disciplined M&A strategy aims to create 
value through carefully selected acquisitions, 
ensuring they align with Tekmar’s long-term 
vision and growth objectives. 
Investment Case continued
This investment case demonstrates why Tekmar is 
uniquely placed as a market leader in offshore wind, 
oil and gas, and marine civil engineering. With a robust 
strategy, clear growth opportunities, and a commitment to 
sustainable and profitable performance, Tekmar offers a 
compelling proposition for long-term investors. 

www.tekmargroup.com
88
www.tekmargroup.com
89
www.tekmargroup.com
Risk 2. Project timings and delay to contract awards 
Risk Type: Strategic, Financial performance, Liquidity 
Description: The project-based, contractual nature of 
the Group’s business, coupled with its concentrated 
customer base, leads to a revenue profile that is 
inherently uneven over the year. Most contract awards 
and associated revenues are dependent on large 
capital projects within the energy sector, the timing of 
which is out of the business’ control. 
Impact:  There is an associated risk that the fulfilment 
of any contract, together with its revenue, may fall 
outside the financial period that was originally forecast. 
This, in turn, may have a material adverse impact on 
the Group’s reported financial performance for the 
specific period. As noted in the basis of preparation of 
the financial statements on page 125, there is a risk 
that delays in contract award could lead to liquidity 
challenges for the Group. 
Mitigation: The business has produced a 5-year 
strategic plan that includes an assessment on project 
timing and the revenue streams macro climate. The 
wider Group portfolio offers a mix of project timings 
due to new markets and regions as well as further 
diversification into service based revenue streams. 
Evaluation: Monitored by Board 
Risk 3. Macroeconomic environment 
Risk Type: Financial, Operational 
Description: General economic conditions: This 
risk relates to the Group’s exposure to short-term 
macroeconomic conditions in our sector such as 
inflation, cost increases and supply chain logistics. 
The factors driving the market changes can be outside 
of the Group’s control and difficult to forecast.   
Impact: The Group has experienced increased 
supply chain costs and general cost inflation.  These 
Macroeconomic changes have the potential to reduce 
the financial resources available to the Group. 
Mitigation: The Group cannot control the market 
conditions in which it operates. The Group has 
implemented effective cost initiatives, enhanced 
controls surrounding pricing and gross margin 
management.  
Evaluation: The Board continues to closely monitor the 
increased macroeconomic risks which are mitigated 
by enhanced controls.
Risk Management  
Identifying, evaluating and monitoring the key indicators 
to the success of our business is pivotal to informing 
our strategic decision making. 
The Board has overall responsibility for setting the 
course for the Group’s risk management objectives 
and policies. Working within the offshore energy 
industry, managing risk is integral to our business and 
we continuously review our policies, procedures and 
behaviours to mitigate our risks and reduce them to 
acceptable levels. 
The objective of the Board is to set policies that seek 
to mitigate ongoing risk as far as possible whilst 
maintaining the Group’s competitiveness and flexibility. 
The Board believes this helps to sustain stakeholder 
value; from key suppliers to end-customers; while also 
protecting the Group’s established corporate culture 
and creating shareholder value. 
The Group operates a structured process in relation 
to risk management, including both financial and 
non-financial controls, which identifies and evaluates 
risks and uncertainties and reviews activity to mitigate 
those risks.  The most salient and significant risks 
that the Board considers could potentially impact the 
business are described below.  We consider the nature 
of the Group’s principal risks and uncertainties have 
not materially changed since last year: 
Risk 1. Access to capital (Liquidity Risk & Cashflow 
Risk) 
Risk Type: Strategic, Finance 
Description: Access to capital is a significant factor in 
the Group’s ability to maintain sufficient liquidity which 
underpins the trading activity of the Group. There is 
uncertainty in relation to how, when and to what extent 
developments will impact on the markets we operate 
in, the wider economy, levels of investor activity and 
confidence. 
Impact: Without access to sufficient finance the 
company may struggle to maintain sufficient liquidity 
or undertake all aspects of its organic growth 
plan alongside as Groups acquisition strategy for 
accelerated growth.  
Mitigation: The business has ongoing relationships 
with banks and other financial institutions that offer 
the required level of support.  The Group has previously 
strengthened its cash position with the extension on 
banking facilities and the equity fundraise.  As noted 
in the basis of preparation of the financial statements 
on page 125, there is a risk that bank facilities are not 
renewed. The business has a strong relationship with 
Barclays and as a result, management are confident 
that bank facilities will continue to be available to the 
Group for the foreseeable future.  
In April 2023,  the Group received capital investment 
from SCF Partners and related parties of £4.3m 
alongside a placing and retail fund raise of £2.1m raised 
cash proceeds of £5.3m, net of expenses.   In addition, 
SCF Partners have committed, with conditions an 
additional investment of £18.0m available through the 
convertible loan note facility. The strategic investment 
from a global institutional investor in the energy 
sector provides funding for the Company to follow 
an ambitious plan for growth, both organically and by 
acquisition. 
Evaluation: Monitored by Board

www.tekmargroup.com
90
www.tekmargroup.com
91
www.tekmargroup.com
Risk 6. Recruitment and Retention of Key People 
Risk Type: Operational, Compliance;  
Description: The business may fail to attract, develop 
and retain key individuals with the skillsets required 
to maintain a successful business and culture, 
particularly within engineering and leadership. 
Impact: A major impact on Tekmar’s ability to fulfil its 
contractual obligations. Adverse impact on the future 
growth aspirations for the Group.  
Mitigation: Key KPI’s are reviewed monthly by the 
Executive Team and Board. 
In addition, the People Strategy has been developed 
to focus on the retention and development of talent. 
Annual appraisal assessments are undertaken and 
a skills matrix and succession plan developed from 
this, including risk mitigation plans. 
Annual review of remuneration and benefits to 
ensure we are consistent across the Group and are 
competitive in the relevant region. Executives and 
senior management incentive plan in place. 
Regular pulse surveys to invite feedback on a range of 
issues over the period.  
Evaluation: Monitored by board.
Risk 7. Risk of claims and failure to meet contractual 
obligations 
Risk Type: Strategic, Financial, Operational 
Description: The Group enters contracts that 
contain terms that, in some cases, contain wide 
reaching indemnities and warranties. These terms 
are commonplace in the subsea industry and do not 
unfairly prejudice the Group, nor do they put the Group 
in a materially worse position than its competitors. 
These warranties and indemnities lead to an inherent 
risk that the Group’s liability for any breach could 
be extensive, especially if these are given on an 
uncapped basis. 
Impact: A major impact on the business’ ability to 
fulfil its contractual obligations. Adverse impact on 
the future growth strategy for the business. 
Mitigation: Contracts are reviewed extensively prior 
to signing, and the likelihood of risks assessed by 
legal and technical teams.  Uncapped liabilities are 
kept to a minimum and only agreed to for areas of the 
contract that Directors believe are very low risk. Where 
possible the Group insures against risks to minimise 
the potential financial impact. There is a strong focus 
across the Group on high quality project execution 
which is regularly reviewed under independent ISO 
certification where appropriate. 
Evaluation:  Monitored by board.
Risk 4. Systems and processes 
Risk Type: Operational, Compliance    
Description: IT systems are vital to the operations 
of the Group. Failure to adequately invest in and 
maintain the Group’s systems could lead to the loss 
or theft of sensitive data or compromise the Group’s 
ability to effectively carry out operations. 
Impact: Systems failures could lead to an inability 
to meet customers’ needs and lead to reputational 
damage. The loss of sensitive information could lead 
to significant damage with an associated risk of fines. 
Mitigation: The Group predominantly outsources 
provision of IT services to a suitably qualified 
third-party, whose competence and service are 
regularly reviewed.  Regular staff training is offered 
or mandated, depending upon the nature of the 
training, to ensure that all staff maintain awareness 
of their responsibilities with respects to IT security, 
with particular focus on cyber-security. The Group is 
currently undertaking the implementation of a new 
finance and business system which is scheduled to 
be implemented by March 2025. 
Evaluation: Risks remain low due to continuous 
review and upgrade of systems as required. 
Risk 5. Technology and competition 
Risk Type: Strategic
Description: The risk of new competitors leading to 
a reduction in pricing.  Design changes could lead to 
technology obsolescence and subsequently reduced 
volume of sales. 
Impact: Reduced volume of sales. Increase in capital 
expenditure to develop new products. Resulting in a 
reduction in the Group’s financial performance. 
Mitigation: The business undergoes a detailed 
technology 
readiness 
level 
(TRL) 
programme 
when developing new products, which includes an 
assessment of competition and what our ultimate 
value proposition would be. Significant investment 
is made in the continuous development of existing 
products to ensure they keep pace with current 
market trends. Our more diversified product portfolio 
allows us to offer a unique proposition to customers. 
Evaluation: Monitored by board
Risk Management continued

www.tekmargroup.com
92
www.tekmargroup.com
93
www.tekmargroup.com
Risk 8. Financial management risks 
Risk Type: Financial 
Description: Price Risk: The Group’s key products are 
reliant on key components including Polyurethane 
(PU), Cast Iron and Concrete. There is an inherent 
risk that price increases outside of Groups control 
can have an impact on the trading conditions and 
environment in which the Group operates. 
Interest Rate Risk: The current economic position 
within the UK has led the Bank of England to decrease 
the base interest rate. Current economic outlook 
suggests that borrowing rates are likely to remain at a 
high level in the short term. The current interest rates 
will lead to annual borrowing costs for the Group 
consistent with FY24. 
Exchange Rate Risk: The Group’s continued expansion 
into international markets increases the Group’s 
exposure to risks associated with changes in foreign 
currency exchange rates on sales and operations. 
The proportion of revenue denominated in currencies 
other than pound sterling is expected to increase. 
Exchange rate variations could have an impact on the 
Groups reported financial results. 
Credit Risk: The ability of the Group along with its 
key stakeholders, customers and suppliers to avoid 
default on credit is key to future growth strategy of 
the business. 
Impact: Without access to sufficient finance the 
company may struggle to undertake all aspects of 
its growth plan, such as the acquisition strategy and 
accelerated growth. 
Mitigation: The business has ongoing relationships 
with banks and other financial institutions that 
offer the required level of support.  The Group has 
strengthened its cash position with the extension on 
banking facilities.  Cash flow forecasts are updated 
and discussed regularly, with analysis prepared at 
both a subsidiary and Group level. 
Exchange Rate Risk: Where revenues are generated 
in international markets, with contracts denominated 
in non-sterling currencies, the Group aims to create a 
natural hedge by matching the currency of the supply 
chain to the currency of the revenue stream. Where 
natural hedges are not available or do not sufficiently 
cover the exposure, management will consider the use 
of forward currency contracts to mitigate exchange 
rate risks. 
Enhanced due diligence is undertaken at the 
contracting stage to understand the price impacts 
of a particular contract, detailed financial project 
reviews are undertaken with multiple key suppliers 
underpinning the core of the Group’s supply chain. 
Evaluation:  Increased risk due to economic 
environment, monitor.
This Strategic Report was approved by order of the 
Board. 
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer
3 March 2025
Risk Management continued
Audit Committee Report  
It is my pleasure to present the Audit Committee 
Report for the year ended 30 September 2024.  The 
Committee comprises David Kemp, a Non-Executive 
Director and myself as Chair.  As a Chartered 
Accountant I bring the relevant financial experience 
in this role and this is my third year as Audit Chair for 
the Company.  
Responsibilities 
The Audit Committee oversees the formal and 
transparent arrangements for considering how the 
Board should apply the financial reporting and internal 
control principles for the Company and the wider 
Group and it maintains an appropriate relationship 
with the Company’s auditors.  
We monitor the integrity of the financial statements 
of the Company, including its annual and half-yearly 
reports, interim management statements, and any 
other formal announcements relating to its financial 
performance, including reviewing any significant 
financial reporting issues and judgements which they 
contain. 
The full Terms of Reference can be found on the 
Group’s website, covering the following areas: 
•	
Financial Reporting  
•	
Internal Controls and Risk Management Systems 
•	
Compliance, whistleblowing and fraud 
•	
External Audit 
Internal Controls and Risk Management Systems 
The Audit Committee supports the Board in 
reviewing the risk management methodology and the 
effectiveness of internal controls. During the year the 
Group has continued to enhance its financial internal 
controls and governance procedures, including those 
relating to cyber-crime, and these are kept under 
constant review. 
External auditor 
The Audit Committee monitors the relationship 
with the external auditor, Grant Thornton UK LLP, to 
ensure that auditor independence and objectivity are 
maintained. Through this review, the Audit Committee 
monitors the provision of non-audit services by the 
external auditor. The non-audit services provided by 
Grant Thornton UK LLP are disclosed in note 8 of the 
financial statements. These fees, which amounted to 
£8k, are considered to be a low value and therefore do 
not impact on the auditor’s independence. 
Significant issues considered in relation to the 
financial statements 
Significant risks relate to those significant non-
routine transactions that are deemed complex and/
or highly judgmental.  The significant risks and key 
audit matters relating to the financial statements 
for this year were considered, discussed with the 
auditors and concluded upon.  Details can be found in 
the Independent Auditor Report and are summarised 
below:
•	
Revenue Recognition – there are two types of 
revenue that require management judgement, 
being revenue recognised over time and revenue 
recognised at a point in time. The significant 
risk relates to the assessment of the revenue 
recognised overtime. 
•	
Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets – 
there is a significant risk regarding the valuation 
of intangible assets including goodwill, which 
are based on management’s assessment and 
assumptions in the annual impairment review. 
This risk is relevant to the offshore energy CGU.

www.tekmargroup.com
94
www.tekmargroup.com
95
www.tekmargroup.com
•	
Accounting for defect notices and insurance 
claims – Identifying for completeness all defect 
notices received and their appropriate disclosure 
in accordance with IAS 37 is a significant risk. 
Whilst many of these notices relate to an industry 
wide issue alleging CPS failures, they are each 
considered separately on their own merits in 
determining the appropriate accounting treatment. 
This disclosure is based on management’s 
assessment of whether a present obligation 
exists. The Group has received funds following 
commercial settlement with insurers post year 
end, a risk exists around the Group’s recognition 
and disclosure in relation to the insurance receipts 
in accordance with IAS37. 
•	
Going concern – The Group forecasts show that 
the debt facilities which are relied upon, are due for 
renewal in June 2025 and the CBIL’s facility due for 
renewal in October 2025. Additionally a material 
uncertainty regarding the timing of contract 
awards is included in the basis of preparation.  
•	
Contract loss provision - There is a significant level 
of management judgement and estimation needed 
to assess the provisions. There is a significant 
level of judgement, being the estimation in 
calculating future expected costs on the contracts 
as the contracts are bespoke in nature. As there 
are several multi-year projects, the estimate 
around forecasting losses is sensitive and has the 
potential for material error.  
•	
Valuation of parent company’s investments in 
subsidiaries – this risk associated with valuation 
of subsidiaries is increased by the uncertainty 
caused by the current economic climate.   
•	
Management override of controls – this is a non-
rebuttable presumed risk for all companies and is 
reviewed for all companies in the Group.
As Chair of the Audit Committee, I am satisfied that 
the Audit Committee Report covers the activities of the 
Committee over the year to 30 September 2024 along 
with the subsequent audit of the financial statements. 
I will be available at the Group’s Annual General Meeting 
to discuss any matters raised in this report. 
David Wilkinson 
Chair of the Audit Committee 
3 March 2025
Audit Committee Report continued
I, David Wilkinson, Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee, present the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for the year ended 30 September 2024.  I 
chair the Remuneration Committee and am joined by 
Colin Welsh Independent Non-Executive Director. The 
report provides shareholders with details regarding 
our Directors’ remuneration policy and the impact 
of this on Executive remuneration outcomes in 
the period, along with how this links to the Group’s 
financial performance. 
Responsibilities 
The Remuneration Committee ensures that the 
Executive Directors and Executive Management 
are fairly rewarded for their individual contributions 
to the overall performance of the Group, having 
appropriate regard to the views of our shareholders 
and other stakeholders.  Our policy aims to provide 
appropriate incentives to encourage enhanced Group 
performance, without paying more than is necessary, 
having regard to relevant remuneration trends. 
The Committee also oversees any major changes 
in employee benefit structures across the Group, 
also ensuring changes to employment law are duly 
enacted. 
The remuneration of Non-Executive Directors is a 
matter for the Chairman of the Board along with 
the Executive Members, not this Remuneration 
Committee, and no Director or Manager is involved in 
any decisions as to his or her own remuneration. 
Executive Incentive Plan (EIP) 
The Group operates an Executive Incentive Plan to 
ensure the Senior Management Team are motivated 
and rewarded for supporting the growth aspirations 
of the Group.  The EIP is made up of equal parts long 
term share option plans and bonus, with values being 
indicative of an individual’s role and tenor.  The EIP is 
reviewed by this Committee to ensure performance 
measures align to the financial targets of the Group, 
including reward for material stretch targets. 
Targets for the CEO, CFO and the remaining Executive 
Management Team are based on Adjusted Earnings 
Before Interest & Tax and Cash Generation.   
Employee remuneration 
Annual Pay Review  
In recognition of the hard work and loyalty of our 
people during the last twelve months, and to assist 
with cost of living, we confirmed an inflationary award 
of 3% to all eligible staff from 1 October 2024. 
Sharesave Plan 2024 (SAYE ) 
Following the success of our previous Sharesave 
plans we launched a fourth plan in March 2024.  The 
scheme was again open to all employees subject to 
a qualifying service period.  A total of 12 employees 
subscribed to 1,045,472 share options over a period 
of three years.   
Remuneration Committee 
Report 

www.tekmargroup.com
96
www.tekmargroup.com
97
www.tekmargroup.com
Group Remuneration Policy 
The key components of the remuneration policy are: 
Remuneration Committee Report continued
Why
How
Basic annual salary
To attract and retain the 
right talent reflecting the 
responsibilities of the role, 
along with experience and skills 
required.
Inflationary pay rises tracking 
national indicators
Pension
To provide a contributory pension 
scheme in line with or exceeding 
statutory requirements, to provide 
employees with support after 
retirement
The Group continues to contribute 
5% to employees’ pensions 
and has transitioned to a salary 
sacrifice scheme within the year
Other benefits
Additional benefits to support 
the health and wellbeing of our 
employees
Life assurance, healthcare 
scheme, wellbeing programme
Annual bonus
To reward high-performing 
individuals
Annual bonus with performance 
criteria based upon financial 
targets, to support the Group’s 
growth strategy. 
The key criteria for performance 
is based on revenue growth, 
Adjusted EBITDA and cash 
generation.
Share Schemes
Share ownership is an important 
part of employee incentivisation 
and retention 
All employee SIP and SAYE 
Plans and LTIPs for executive 
management 
Remuneration of the Board  
The Remuneration Committee reviewed the market rates in considering the remuneration of the CEO and CFO 
during the period, along with the Non-Executive Director roles, and confirm they remain in line with appropriate 
benchmarks.   
Director 
remuneration
Basic 
salary / 
fees
Share 
awards
Social 
security
Bonus
Company 
Pension
 contributions
FY24 
Total
FY23 
Total
Name of Director
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
A MacDonald
241
67
41
-
-
349
486
J Brown
83
-
13
-
13
94
69
D Bulmer
-
-
-
-
-
-
122
I Ritchey
69
-
7
-
7
83
38
D Wilkinson
46
-
11
40
-
97
41
L Wilkinson
168
10
22
-
19
219
234
C Welsh
40
-
4
-
-
44
20
S Lockard
53
-
-
-
-
53
21
DM Kemp
6
-
1
-
-
7
-
LB Krogsgaard
6
-
-
-
-
6
-
R Turner
25
-
3
-
3
31
-
Retention Plan
Following the resignation of the former CEO, James Ritchie, on 3 August 2020 the Board approved a new share 
option incentive plan, the Retention Plan, to further incentivise the Executive Management Team. The team 
were granted awards for up to 200,000 ordinary shares based on length of service, effectively reallocating a 
large proportion of the IPO options that lapsed on James leaving. 
Retention plan
Options b/fwd
Options lapsed- 
employment
Options exercised
Remaining options
A MacDonald
17,073
-
17,073
-
Under the plan shares became available to exercise on 2nd June 2021.  All options in relation to the retention 
plan have now been exercised or lapsed.

www.tekmargroup.com
98
www.tekmargroup.com
99
www.tekmargroup.com
LTIPs
In April 2023, the remuneration committee approved a Long term Incentive Plan to incentivise and reward 
management for the three financial years, ending 31 March 2026. Management were granted awards for up to 
4,819,666 ordinary shares. There are no performance conditions for this tranche of LTIPs. 
The table below shows the activity in the period in relation to LTIPs including the position at the period end, 
showing those options lapsing due to performance conditions not being met and those lapsing due to the 
employment conditions not being met.
Remuneration Committee Report continued
LTIPS
Options Granted
Option lapsed - 
employment
Option Exercised
Remaining 
options
Alasdair Macdonald
2,427,600
(1,618,400)
(809,200)
-
Leanne Wilkinson
375,000
-
(125,000)
250,000
Other Senior 
Management
1,454,565
(645,305)
(246,080)
563,180
The Board recognises the need to ensure the Executive Management Team remain incentivised going 
forward and will be launching the FY25 LTIP once clear of the financial closed period.  This will include the 
arrangements for the current CEO and CFO.
The above report sets out our approach to remuneration for the Executive Management Team and employees.  
However, if you have any questions regarding this, I will be available at the Group’s Annual General Meeting to 
discuss them.
David Wilkinson
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
3 March 2025
Nomination Committee 
Report
I, Lars Krogsgaard, Chair of the Nomination Committee, 
present the Nomination Committee Report for the year 
ended 30 September 2024.  The Committee comprises 
Lars Krogsgaard, Steve Lockard and David Wilkinson.
Responsibilities
The Nomination Committee regularly reviews the 
structure, size and composition of the Board and 
makes recommendations to the Board with regard 
to any changes.  We give regular consideration to 
the succession planning for Directors and Senior 
Executives, taking into account the skills and 
experience needed both now and in the future.
During 2024, the Committee maintained its focus 
on the careful succession planning of the Board and 
Executive Management Team to ensure that they 
remain effective in driving forward the strategy of the 
Company.
There have been three changes to the Board this 
year and I provide more detail as to the Nomination 
Committee’s involvement and process below.
Appointment of Chief Executive Officer – September 
2024
On 2 September 2024, we welcomed Richard Turner 
to the board of directors in the role of Chief Executive 
Officer. 
Appointment of Chairman – September 2024
On 30 September 2024, Steve Lockard was appointed 
to the role of Chairman.
Non-Executive directors  – August 2024
On 12 August 2024, we welcomed David Kemp and Lars 
Krogsgaard to the Board as Non-Executive Directors. 
Other changes
On 12 August 2024, Ian Ritchey stepped down from the 
role of Non-executive Director.
On 2 September 2024, Alasdair Macdonald stepped 
down from the role of Chief Executive Officer taking on 
the role of Executive director.
On 30 September 2024, Julian Brown stepped down 
from the role of Chairman.
Lars Krogsgaard
Chair of the Nomination Committee
3 March 2025

www.tekmargroup.com
100
www.tekmargroup.com
101
www.tekmargroup.com
Directors’ report
The Directors present their report together with the 
audited Group financial statements of the Parent 
Company (‘the Company’) and the Group for the year 
ended 30 September 2024.
Directors
The directors who held office during the year and up to 
the date to the approval of accounts were as follows:
Richard Turner - Appointed 2nd September 2024
Leanne Wilkinson 	
David Wilkinson
Colin Welsh	
	
Steve Lockard
David Kemp - Appointed 12th August 2024
Lars Krogsgaard	 - Appointed 12th August 2024
Alasdair Macdonald
Julian Brown - Resigned 30th September 2024
Ian Ritchey - Resigned 12th August 2024
Business review and future developments
The information that fulfils the requirements of the 
strategic report and business review, including details 
of the results for the year ended 30 September 2024, 
principal risks and uncertainties, financial KPIs and the 
outlook for future years, are set out in the Chairman’s 
Statement and Chief Executive Officer’s and Chief 
Financial Officer’s Reviews.
Research and development
The business continuously invests in research 
and development activity. The highlight during the 
financial year was the continued development of 
the next generation TekLink product in the offshore 
wind division. A total of £85,000 of Research and 
Development costs were incurred in year. All costs have 
been capitalised as intangible assets under IAS38.
Major   shareholders
As at 1st February 2025 the following interests of 
shareholders in excess of 3% have been notified to 
the Company:
Number of 
ordinary 
shares
Ordinary 
shares as a 
% of issued 
share capital
SCF-IX, L.P.
43,616,569
31.69%
Schroders plc
16,825,738
12.21%
J O Hambro 
Capital 
Management 
Limited
12,683,333
9.22%
River Global 
Investors
10,081,580
7.33%
Hargreaves 
Lansdown, 
Stockbrokers 
(EO)
6,051,217
4.40%
for the year ended 30 September 2024
Going Concern
The Group meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through its available banking facilities 
which includes a CBILs loan of £3.0m currently 
available to 31 October 2025 and a trade loan facility 
of up to £4.0m that can be drawn against supplier 
payments, currently available to 31 July 2025.  The 
latter is provided with support of 80% from UKEF 
due to the nature of the business activities both in 
renewable energies and in driving growth through 
export lead opportunities. The Group held £4.6m of 
cash at 30 September 2024 including draw down of 
the £3.0m CBILS loan and a further £3.1m of the trade 
loan facility. There are no financial covenants that the 
Group must adhere to in either of the bank facilities.
The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts to 
31 March 2026.  The base case forecasts include 
assumptions for annual revenue growth supported 
by current order book, known tender pipeline, and 
by publicly available market predictions for the 
sector.  The forecasts also assume a retention of the 
costs base of the business with increases of 5% on 
salaries and consistent gross   margin on contracts. 
These forecasts show that the Group is expected 
to have a sufficient level of financial resources 
available to continue to operate on the assumption 
that the two facilities described are renewed and 
refinanced respectively. Within the base case model 
management have modelled the outflow of cash of 
£5.8m   in relation to note 20 Provisions within the 
going concern period which is offset against the 
corresponding insurance receivable within the same 
period, Management have not modelled anything in 
relation to the matter set out in note 20 Contingent 
Liabilities, as management have assessed there to be 
no present obligation  .
The Directors have sensitised their base case 
forecasts for a severe but plausible downside 
impact.  This sensitivity includes reducing revenue 
by 17% (£10m equivalent) for 18 month the period 
to 31 March 2026, to model the potential loss or 
delay of a certain level of contracts in the pipeline 
that form the base case forecast, and a further 5% 
increase in costs across the Group as a whole for 
the same period. In addition, the delays of specific 
cash receipts have been modelled. The base case 
and sensitised forecast also include discretionary 
spend on capital outlay. The Directors note there is 
further discretionary spend within their control which 
could be cut, if necessary, although this has not been 
modelled in the sensitised case given the headroom 
already available.  These sensitivities have been 
modelled to give the Directors comfort in adopting 
the going concern basis of preparation for these 
financial statements.  Further to this, a ‘reverse stress 
test’ was performed to determine at what point there 
would be a break in the model, the reverse stress 
test included reducing order intake by £15m (60% 
of unsecured revenue) and increasing overheads 
by 7% against the base case. In addition, the delays 
of specific cash receipts have been modelled, this 
results in elimination of liquidity headroom in the final 
month in the going concern period. The severe but 
plausible case includes mitigating actions such as 
delayed capital expenditure spend.    
Facilities - Within the base case, severe but plausible 
case and reverse stress test, management have 
assumed the renewal of trade loan facility in July 
2025 and renewal or conversion of the CBILS loan into 
a term loan in October 2025. In the unlikely case that 
the facilities are not renewed, the Group would aim 
to take a number of co-ordinated actions designed to 
avoid the cash deficit   that would arise. 
The Directors are confident, based upon the 
communications with the team at Barclays, the 
historical strong relationship and recent bank facility 
renewal in November 2024, that these facilities will 
be renewed and will be available for the foreseeable 
future. The renewal of the two facilities in October 
2025 and July 2025 are yet to be formally agreed and 
the Group’s forecasts rely on their renewal.
Contract Award and Timings – In the severe but 
plausible scenario, management has adjusted the base 
case forecast to account for the potential downside 
impact of order intake not being converted within the 
expected timescales. This adjustment results in a 17% 
reduction in revenue over the entire going concern 
period. This sensitised model shows that there is 
sufficient cash headroom to continue to operate the 
business. 

www.tekmargroup.com
102
www.tekmargroup.com
103
www.tekmargroup.com
The Group operates on a contract basis and during 
the normal course of business, contracts are expected 
to be executed within specific timeframes during the 
forecast period.  If the Group fails to secure a number 
of significant contracts, in line with its forecasted 
timeframes, during a period of lower cash reserves 
cash headroom would be breached. Management 
does not consider this to be a likely outcome based 
on current backlog levels being representative of 
prior periods coupled with a strong pipeline visibility, 
opportunities at preferred supplier status and further 
anticipated contract awards within the required 
timescales. Such contract awards would provide 
sufficient cash resources for the going concern period. 
Both the required renewal of the facilities and contract 
award timing represent events or conditions which 
would indicate a material uncertainty that may cast 
significant doubt on the Group’s and the parent 
company’s ability to continue as a going concern.  
The Directors are satisfied that, taking account 
of reasonably foreseeable changes in trading 
performance and on the basis that the bank facilities 
are renewed, these forecasts and projections show 
that the Group is expected to have a sufficient level of 
financial resources available through current facilities 
to continue in operational existence and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due for at least the next 12 months 
from the date of approval of the financial statements 
and for this reason they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the financial statements.
Dividends
The Directors do not anticipate that the Company will 
declare a dividend in the near term, as available cash 
will support working capital requirements along with 
the identified strategic investment plan.  No dividends 
have been paid in the period. 
Directors and their interests
The Directors of the Company during the period and 
their interests in the ordinary share capital at the end 
of the year are shown in the table below:
Ordinary 
shares of
1p each
30 September 
2024
30 September 
2023
A MacDonald   
3,876,140
3,049,867
S Lockard
3,888,889
3,888,889
L Wilkinson
489,130
-
There have been no changes to the above 
shareholdings since the period end. Post year end 
Richard Turner (CEO) has acquired 799,313 shares on 
28 January 2025.
Further details of the Directors’ interests can be found 
in the Remuneration Committee Report.
Directors indemnities
The Group has not made qualifying third-party 
indemnity provisions for the benefit of its Directors 
during the year.
Streamline energy and carbon reporting (SECR)
The Group does not report under SECR as none of 
its subsidiary undertakings are large companies. The 
parent company is exempt from reporting as it is a 
low energy user consuming less than 40MWh per 
annum. 
Relations with stakeholders
The Group considers its key stakeholders to be 
its shareholders, employees and customers and 
suppliers. How the Group engages with these, 
and broader stakeholders is described in the s172 
statement on page 26.
Financial risk management
Details of the Group’s exposure to financial risks are 
set out in Note 22 to the financial statements.
Takeover Directive requirements
The Company has one class of equity share, namely 
1p ordinary shares. The shares have equal voting 
rights and there are no special rights or restrictions 
attaching to any of them or their transfer to other 
persons. The rights and obligations attaching to these 
shares are governed by the Companies Act 2006 and 
the Company’s Articles.
Rules governing the appointment and replacement 
of Directors, and those relating to the amendment of 
the Company’s Articles of Association, are contained 
within those Articles of Association, a copy of which 
is located on the Company’s website (investors.
tekmar.co.uk).
Notice of Annual General Meeting
The Annual General Meeting will be held at 9.30am 
on 27 March 2025 at Pod 3, The Workplace, Heighton 
Lane, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 
6AH.  The Notice of Annual General Meeting which 
sets out the resolutions to be proposed at the 
forthcoming AGM has been posted to shareholders. 
These Group financial statements will be laid before 
the Company in a general meeting held at 9.30am on 
27 March 2025 at Pod 3, The Workplace, Heighton 
Lane, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 
6AH. The Notice of General Meeting which sets 
out the resolutions to be proposed at that meeting 
accompanies these Group financial statements.
Events after the reporting date
After the reporting period, the Group received 
insurance proceeds of £5.2m in relation to legacy 
warranty matters. Further details can be found in 
note 20 of the annual report. There were no other 
subsequent events.  
Independent auditor
The auditor, Grant Thornton UK LLP, has been 
re-appointed and a resolution concerning their 
appointment will be proposed at the AGM.
Disclosure of information to the auditor
The directors confirm that at the time this report is 
approved:
•	
So far as each director is aware, there is no 
relevant audit information of which the company’s 
auditor is unaware; and
•	
the Directors have taken all the steps that they 
ought to have taken to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information and to establish 
that the company’s auditor is aware of that 
information.
This Directors’ Report was approved by order of the 
Board.
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer
3 March 2025
Directors’ Report continued

www.tekmargroup.com
104
www.tekmargroup.com
105
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report to the members of Tekmar Group plc 
Opinion 
Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified 
We have audited the financial statements of Tekmar Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its 
subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the year ended 30 September 2024, which comprises the Consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, the Consolidated balance sheet, the Consolidated statement of 
changes in equity, the Consolidated cash flow statement, the Notes to the group financial statements, 
including material accounting policy information, the Parent company balance sheet, the Parent 
company statement of changes in equity and Notes to the parent company financial statements, 
including a summary of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has 
been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and UK-adopted 
international accounting standards. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ 
(United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 
In our opinion: 
• 
the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent 
company’s affairs as at 30 September 2024 and of the group’s loss for the year then ended; 
• 
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards; 
• 
the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 
• 
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006. 
 
Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable 
law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the ‘Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit 
of the financial statements’ section of our report. We are independent of the group and the parent company in 
accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, 
including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is 
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 
Material uncertainty related to going concern 
We draw attention to Note 2(b) in the financial statements, which indicates that at the reporting date, the group 
meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through reliance on its available banking facilities which 
includes a COVID Business Interruption Loan (CBIL) of £3.0m, currently available to 31 October 2025 and a 
trade loan facility of up to £4.0m that can be drawn against supplier payments, currently available to 31 July 
2025. The note also confirms that it is not certain that the facilities will be renewed or refinanced. The cash flow 
forecasts show that the group is expected to have a sufficient level of financial resources available to continue to 
operate on the assumption that the two facilities described are renewed however, the renewal of both facilities is 
not guaranteed.  
Furthermore, Note 2(b) in the financial statements, also indicates that the going concern basis of preparation is 
dependent on the group securing significant contract awards in line with the forecast time. If certain significant 
contract awards are delayed, the Group may not have a sufficient level of financial resources available to 
continue to operate as a going concern. 
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual 
Report and the Group and parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with applicable law and 
regulations.  
Company law requires the directors to prepare Group 
and parent Company financial statements for each 
financial year.  Under the AIM Rules of the London 
Stock Exchange, they are required to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted 
International Accounting Standards (IFRS’s) and 
applicable law and they have elected to prepare the 
parent Company financial statements in accordance 
with UK accounting standards and applicable law (UK 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice), including 
FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.
Under company law the directors must not approve 
the financial statements unless they are satisfied that 
they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of 
the Group and parent Company and of their profit or 
loss for that period.  In preparing each of the Group and 
Parent company financial statements, the directors are 
required to:  
•	
select suitable accounting policies and then apply 
them consistently;  
•	
make judgements and estimates that are 
reasonable and prudent;  
•	
for the Group financial statements, state whether 
applicable UK-adopted International Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements;  
•	
for the parent Company financial statements, 
state whether applicable UK accounting standards 
have been followed, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements;  
•	
Prepare the financial statements on the going 
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume 
that the Group and parent company will continue 
on that basis;  
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and 
explain the parent Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial 
position of the parent Company and enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006.  They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the parent company and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other irregularities.
The directors are responsible for preparing the 
annual report in accordance with applicable law 
and regulations. Having taken advice from the Audit 
Committee, the directors consider the annual report 
and the financial statements, taken as a whole, provides 
the information necessary to assess the company’s 
performance, business model and strategy and is fair, 
balanced and understandable. 
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information 
included on the company’s website.  Legislation in 
the UK governing the preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions.  
Richard Turner
Chief Executive Officer
3 March 2025
Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities

www.tekmargroup.com
106
www.tekmargroup.com
107
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
As stated in Note 2(b), these events or conditions, along with the other matters as set forth in Note 2(b), indicate 
that a material uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the group and parent company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.  
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the director's use of the going concern basis of 
accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.  
Our evaluation of management’s assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern 
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue to adopt 
the going concern basis of accounting included: 
• 
Obtaining an understanding of how management prepared their base case and sensitised forecasts for 
the period to March 2026;  
• 
Assessing the accuracy of management’s forecasting by comparing the reliability of past forecasts to 
management’s actual results, and considering whether management’s historic forecasting accuracy 
impacts the reliance we can place upon the forecasts provided;  
• 
Obtaining an understanding of key trading, balance sheet and cash flow assumptions and testing those 
key assumptions to underlying historical financial data, post year end trading information and market 
analysis data;  
• 
Considering the inherent risks associated with the group’s and the parent company’s business model 
including effects arising from macro-economic factors such as inflation and assessing how these factors 
were incorporated into the base case and sensitised forecasts; 
• 
Assessing the terms of the external debt held and challenging management’s assessment of the 
possibility of renewal during the going concern period including correspondence with the lender;  
• 
Assessing the plausibility of the mitigating actions available to management to continue as a going 
concern if downside sensitivities were to crystalise;   
• 
Evaluating management’s reverse stress test and worse-case forecasts and management’s 
consideration of the magnitude of a decline in cash that would give rise to the elimination of the 
headroom in the borrowing facilities;  
• 
Performing arithmetical and consistency checks on management’s going concern base case, severe but 
plausible and reverse stress test models; and  
• 
Assessing the adequacy of related disclosures within the annual report for consistency with 
management's assessment of going concern and whether they are in line with the accounting 
standards. 
Our responsibilities  
We are responsible for concluding on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of 
accounting and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or 
conditions that may cast significant doubt on the group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our report to the 
related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify the auditor’s 
opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our report. However, future 
events or conditions may cause the group or the parent company to cease to continue as a going concern. 
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the 
relevant sections of this report. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our approach to the audit 
 
 
 
Overview of our audit approach 
Overall materiality:  
Group: £329,000, which represents approximately 1% of the 
group’s revenue. 
Parent company: £492,000, which represents approximately 1% 
of the parent company’s total assets. 
In addition to the matter described in the Material uncertainty 
related to going concern section, we have determined the matters 
described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated 
in our report. 
Key audit matters were identified as:   
• Accounting for defect notices and the completeness of 
the defect provision (updated from the previous year 
to include reference to provision);   
• Occurrence of contract revenue (same as previous 
year); and 
• 
Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets (same as 
previous year). 
Our auditor’s report for the year ended 30 September 2023 
included one key audit matter that has not been reported as key 
audit matters in our current year’s report. This relates to the 
valuation of investments in subsidiaries (parent company only). 
Scoping of the group has been determined to ensure appropriate 
coverage of the significant risks as well as coverage of the key 
quantitative benchmarks used to determine significance of 
components, specifically: 
Group revenue: 96% 
Group absolute loss before tax: 47% 
In response to changes within the group since the prior year, one 
component is no longer subject to specific-scope audit 
procedures as it is a discontued operation; it is instead subject to 
specified audit procedures at the group level.  
Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, 
were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the 
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of 
material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. 
These matters included those that had the greatest effect on: the overall 
audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the 
efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the 
context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in 
forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion 
on these matters.   
 
 
Key audit 
matters
Scoping
Materiality
Description
Audit response
Disclosures
Our results / Key 
Observations
KAM

www.tekmargroup.com
108
www.tekmargroup.com
109
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
In the graph below, we have presented the key audit matters, significant risks and other risks relevant to the 
audit. This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
In addition to the matter described in the material uncertainty related to going concern section, we have 
determined the matters described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. 
Key Audit Matter – Group 
How our scope addressed the matter – Group 
Accounting for defect notices and the 
completeness of the defect provision 
We identified the accounting for defect notices 
and the completeness of the defect provision as 
one of the most significant risks of material 
misstatement due to error. 
This is due to the judgement involved in 
assessing whether there is a present obligation 
for each defect notice received.  
The assessment of whether the requirements of 
IAS 37 Provisions, contingent liabilities and 
contingent assets have been appropriately 
applied is a significant judgement by 
management. 
Where a present obligation has been identified to 
exist at the balance sheet date, a provision 
relating to the defect notice has been recognised. 
There is a high level of estimation uncertainty in 
management’s valuation of the present obligation 
and the provision required. 
Following the receipt of defect notices on 
historical contracts and recent contracts, 
management have considered whether a 
provision or a contingent liability exists for all 
contracts. 
A provision for defect notices has been 
recognised at 30 September 2024 of £5,821,000 
(2023: £nil).  
In responding to the key audit matter, we 
performed the following audit procedures: 
• 
Assessed the design and 
implementation of controls for the 
evaluation of the accounting treatment 
for defect notices and valuing a 
provision; 
• 
Made enquiries of management, the 
group’s internal legal counsel and, 
where applicable, the group’s external 
legal counsel to understand 
management’s conclusion in relation 
to the defect notices received;   
• 
Obtained and read all correspondence 
with customers, and assessed 
management’s conclusions, where this 
has changed from the prior year, 
challenged management regarding the 
change of opinion; 
• 
Read board and other meeting 
minutes to identify areas in relation to 
defect notices and related provision;  
• 
Met with the Group’s internal legal 
counsel to understand ongoing and 
potential legal matters;  
Key audit matter 
Significant risk  
High
Low
Potential
financial
statement
impact
High 
Low 
Extent of management judgement 
Occurrence of 
contract  revenue 
Material
uncertainty
related to going
concern
Completeness of contract 
liabilities 
Accounting for defect notices 
and the completeness of the 
defect provision 
Management override of 
controls 
Valuation of goodwill 
and intangible assets 
 
 
 
 
Key Audit Matter – Group 
How our scope addressed the matter – Group 
A contingent liability has been disclosed at 30 
September 2024 in respect of certain other defect 
notices.  
 
• 
Challenged managements 
assumptions in valuing the provisions 
and whether a present obligation 
exists at the Balance Sheet date; 
• 
Assessed the reasonableness of 
management’s likelihood and the 
quantification of outflow assessment, 
obtaining supporting evidence where 
management have determined there is 
a provision; 
• Reviewed the proposed accounting and 
disclosure of actual and potential 
liabilities; and  
• 
Considered management’s application 
of the requirements of IAS 37 and the 
adequacy of the disclosures. 
 
Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report 
2024 
• 
Financial statements: Note 20, Provisions and 
contingent liabilities.  
• 
Audit committee report: Significant issues 
considered in relation to the financial 
statements   
Our results  
From the work performed, we did not identify any 
material misstatements with regard to the 
accounting for defect notices and the 
completeness of the defect provision. 
 
 
Occurrence of contract revenue 
We identified occurrence of contract revenue as 
one of the most significant assessed risks of 
material misstatement due to fraud and error 
The group has entered into contracts with 
customers which span the 30 September 2024 
year end with varying terms and degrees of 
complexity, generating revenue over time. The 
group uses both the input and output methods for 
recognising revenue over time. 
There is a significant risk of material 
misstatement in open contracts at 30 September 
2024 due to the judgement involved in the related 
estimates for revenue recognised over time in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standard (‘IFRS’) 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts 
with Customers’ and the motivation to meet 
market expectations. Management’s assessment 
includes several key estimates including: 
• 
Estimated total contract costs; and 
• 
Estimated stage of completion derived 
from the outputs satisfied. 
Total revenue recognised over time is 
£30,919,000 (2023: £32,381,000). 
 
 
  
 
In responding to the key audit matter, we 
performed the following audit procedures: 
• 
Assessed the design and 
implementation of key controls in the 
contract revenue recognition process; 
• 
Evaluated the revenue recognition 
policies for consistency with IFRS 15, 
through assessment of management’s 
IFRS 15 paper; including, specifically, 
consideration of management’s 
identification of performance obligations 
and allocation of the transaction prices 
to the performance obligations; 
• 
Obtained an understanding of the 
process and methods of estimating 
costs to complete from project 
managers. We assessed whether there 
were indicators of management bias in 
the assumptions used and corroborated 
estimates based on prior experience to 
historic data; 
• 
For a sample of contracts where 
revenue is recognised using the input 
method, we challenged management’s 
total expected costs to assess if revenue 
had been recognised correctly. We 
compared costs expected with post 
period end results and tested a sample 
of forecasted costs to supporting 

www.tekmargroup.com
110
www.tekmargroup.com
111
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
Key Audit Matter – Group 
How our scope addressed the matter – Group 
evidence such as purchase invoices, 
purchase orders and supplier 
quotations. We also tested costs 
incurred and recorded in the year to 
corroborate each project position at 
year-end; 
• 
For a sample of contracts where 
revenue is recognised using the output 
method, we evaluated the revenue 
assigned to each performance obligation 
and/or output and tested whether this is 
consistent with the outputs achieved in 
the period; 
• 
Tested the historical accuracy of 
forecasting by comparing final outturn of 
completed contracts to original 
forecasts; 
• 
Tested a sample of contracts held by the 
group and recalculated the revenue that 
should have been recognised in the 
period and revenue that should have 
been deferred at the period end; and 
• 
Recalculated the period-end contract 
liabilities  based on management’s 
schedules and performed procedures on 
a sample basis to ensure schedules 
were complete and accurate. 
Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report 
2024  
• 
Financial statements: Note 4 Revenue and 
segmental reporting 
• 
Audit committee report: Significant issues 
considered in relation to the financial 
statements  
Our results 
From the work performed, we did not identify any 
material misstatements with regard to the 
occurrence of contract revenue. 
 
 
Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets 
We identified the valuation of goodwill and 
intangible assets as one of the most significant 
risks of material misstatement due to error, 
specifically in relation to the offshore energy cash 
generating unit (CGU).  
The carrying value of goodwill and other 
intangible assets at 30 September 2024 was 
£16,708,000 (2023: £19,367,000) after an 
impairment charge of £1,546,000 (2023: 
£4,745,000). 
There is an increased risk that the goodwill and 
intangible assets held by the group in relation to 
the offshore energy CGU are impaired as per 
International Accounting Standard (‘IAS’) 36 
‘Impairment of Assets’. This is due to the high 
level of estimation uncertainty in management’s 
assessment of the future performance of the 
CGU and in determining appropriate operating 
cash flows, long-term growth rates and discount 
In responding to the key audit matter, we 
performed the following audit procedures: 
• 
Assessed the design and 
implementation of key controls for the 
impairment review process; 
• 
Assessed management’s identification 
of the CGUs and the assignment of 
assets to those CGUs;  
• 
Assessed management’s annual 
impairment review to determine those 
CGU’s that are most at risk and include 
the most judgement. Specifically, those 
with limited headroom, significant growth 
or high susceptibility to changes in 
assumptions; 
• 
Assessed management’s impairment 
model to ensure appropriate costs and 
expenses are included, and that cash 
flows included in the model are 
 
 
 
 
Key Audit Matter – Group 
How our scope addressed the matter – Group 
rate to apply in calculating the ‘value in use’ of the 
CGU.  
We identified a significant risk within the offshore 
energy CGU as this CGU has a significantly 
material carrying value, significant levels of 
growth assumed, and actual performance has 
been below budget in the current year. 
 
appropriate when taking into 
consideration global macro factors 
including, but not limited to supply chain 
delays, the impact of inflation on 
previously agreed fixed price contracts 
and the UK and global economic 
outlook; 
• 
Assessed the short-term and long-term 
growth rates included in the model by 
comparing the actual results to historical 
forecasting, evidencing accuracy; 
• 
Assessed management’s sensitivity 
analysis for appropriateness and 
whether a reasonably possible change 
would lead to an impairment; 
• 
Engaged valuation experts to assess the 
appropriateness of the discount rate 
included in management’s impairment 
model; and 
• 
Assessed whether the disclosure 
included for the headroom sensitivities is 
appropriate and assessed whether the 
accounting policy is in line with IAS 36 
Impairment of Assets.  
Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report 
2024 
• 
Financial statements: Note 11 Goodwill and 
Other Intangibles 
• 
Audit committee report: Significant issues 
considered in relation to the financial 
statements  
  
 
Key observations 
From the work performed, our challenge of 
management regarding the cash flows and 
growth rates included in the impairment model 
resulted in a material impairment charge being 
recorded. 
Following the recording of the impairment charge, 
we did not identify any further material 
misstatement in the valuation of the goodwill and 
intangible assets related to the offshore wind 
cash generating unit. 
 
 
 
 
 
We did not identify any key audit matters relating to the audit of the financial statements of the parent company 
only. 
Our application of materiality 
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing the audit, and in evaluating the effect of 
identified misstatements on the audit and of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements and in 
forming the opinion in the auditor’s report. 
Materiality was determined as follows: 
Materiality measure 
Group 
Parent company 
Materiality for 
financial statements 
as a whole 
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial 
statements that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of the users of these financial 

www.tekmargroup.com
112
www.tekmargroup.com
113
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
Materiality measure 
Group 
Parent company 
statements. We use materiality in determining the nature, timing and extent 
of our audit work. 
Materiality threshold 
£329,000 (2023: £410,000), which 
represents approximately 1% of the 
group revenue. 
£492,000 (2023: £316,000), which 
represents approximately 1% of total 
assets. 
Significant judgements 
made by auditor in 
determining materiality 
 
In determining materiality, we made 
the following significant judgements:  
• 
The metrics most relevant to the 
users of the financial statements 
which was determined to be 
revenue per the previous 
financial statements;  
• 
Whether the metric has been 
materially influenced by matters 
such as economic uncertainty or 
changes in the marketplace; and 
• 
This benchmark is considered 
the most appropriate because of 
the stability of revenue 
compared to loss before tax. 
Materiality for the current year is  
lower than the level that we 
determined for the year ended 30 
September 2023 to reflect reduction 
in group’s revenue. 
In determining materiality, we made 
the following significant judgements:  
• 
The metrics most relevant to the 
users of the financial statements 
which was determined to be 
total assets for the parent entity; 
• 
Whether the metric has been 
materially influenced by matters 
such as economic uncertainty or 
changes in the marketplace; and 
• 
This benchmark is considered 
the most appropriate because 
the parent company is a holding 
company, which does not trade. 
Materiality for the current year is 
higher than the level that we 
determined for the year ended 30 
September 2023, as materiity in the 
prior year was capped at component 
materiality. 
 
 
 
Performance 
materiality used to 
drive the extent of 
our testing 
We set performance materiality at an amount less than materiality for the 
financial statements as a whole to reduce to an appropriately low level the 
probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements 
exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 
Performance 
materiality threshold 
£231,000 (2023: £287,000), which is 
70% of financial statement 
materiality. 
 
£369,000 (2023: £221,000), which is 
75% (2023: 70%) of financial 
statement materiality.  
Significant judgements 
made by auditor in 
determining 
performance 
materiality 
In determining performance 
materiality, we made the following 
significant judgements: 
• 
The strength of the control 
environment based on our 
assessment of the design and 
implementation of controls; 
and 
• 
Quantum and nature of 
misstatements identified in 
prior year’s audit. 
 
In determining performance 
materiality, we made the following 
significant judgements:  
• 
The strength of the control 
environment based on our 
assessment of the design and 
implementation of controls; and 
• 
Low complexity of the principal 
actitvity.  
 
 
 
 
Materiality measure 
Group 
Parent company 
Specific materiality 
 
We determine specific materiality for one or more particular classes of 
transactions, account balances or disclosures for which misstatements of 
lesser amounts than materiality for the financial statements as a whole could 
reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken 
on the basis of the financial statements. 
Specific materiality  
We determined a lower level of 
specific materiality for the following 
areas: 
• 
Directors’ remuneration; and 
• 
Related party transactions  
outside the normal course of 
business. 
 
We determined a lower level of 
specific materiality for the following 
areas: 
• 
Directors’ remuneration; and 
• 
Related party transactions  
outside the normal course of 
business. 
 
Communication of 
misstatements to the 
audit committee 
We determine a threshold for reporting unadjusted differences to the audit 
committee. 
Threshold for 
communication 
£16,500 (2023: £20,500),  which 
represents 5% of financial statement 
materiality, and misstatements below 
that threshold that, in our view, 
warrant reporting on qualitative 
grounds. 
£24,600 (2023: £15,800),  which 
represents 5% of financial statement 
materiality,  and misstatements 
below that threshold that, in our view, 
warrant reporting on qualitative 
grounds. 
 
The graph below illustrates how performance materiality interacts with our overall materiality and the tolerance for 
communication to the audit committee. 
Overall materiality - Group 
Overall materiality - Parent 
 
 
Revenue, £32.8m
FSM £329,000, 1%
Total Assets, £50.3m
FSM £492,000, 1%

www.tekmargroup.com
114
www.tekmargroup.com
115
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FSM: Financial statement materiality, PM: Performance materiality, TfC: Threshold for communication to the 
audit committee.  
 
An overview of the scope of our audit 
We performed a risk-based audit that requires an understanding of the group’s and the parent company’s 
business and in particular matters related to: 
Understanding the group, its components, their environments, including group-wide controls 
• 
We obtained an understanding of the group and its environment, including group-wide controls and assessed 
the risks of material misstatement at the group level; and 
• 
We obtained an understanding of the effect of the group organisational structure on the scope of the audit, for 
example, the level of centralisation of the group control function and the use of service organisations. 
Identifying components at which to perform audit procedures 
• 
We evaluated the identified components to assess their significance and determined the planned audit 
response based on a measure of materiality. Significance was determined as a percentage of the group’s 
total revenue and the group’s absolute loss before tax as well as considering qualitative factors, such as a 
component’s specific nature or circumstances.  
Type of work to be performed on financial information of parent and other components (including how it 
addressed the key audit matters) 
• 
Audits of the financial information of the component using component materiality (full-scope audit) procedures 
were performed on the financial information of three components. These procedures included a combination 
of tests of detail and analytical procedures. These full-scope audits included the majority our audit work on the 
identified key audit matters as described in the key audit matters section of our report. 
• 
Audits of one or more account balances, classes of transactions or disclosures of the component (specific-
scope audit) procedures were carried out on two component using component materiality. These procedures 
included a combination of tests of details and analytical procedures and were designed to increase coverage 
of the group’s financial statement line items. This specific-scope audit included audit work on one of the 
identified key audit matters as described in the key audit matters section of our report. 
• 
Specified audit procedures were carried out on two components using component materiality. 
FSM £329,000,
1%
PM £231,000,
70%
TfC £16,500,
5%
FSM £492,000,
1%
PM £369,000,
70%
TfC £24,600,
5%
 
 
 
 
• 
For the eight components that were not individually significant to the group, or assessed as requiring specific-
scope audits, analytical procedures were carried out at group level, using group materiality. 
Performance of our audit 
• 
the evaluation of management’s going concern assessment was performed at a group level given the group 
structure and capital management policies; 
• 
the group engagement team attended year-end inventory counts in the UK; 
• 
audit procedures across all components were performed by the group engagement team in accordance with 
the scope described. There were no component engagement teams engaged to support the group 
engagement team; and 
• 
as part of planning procedures, the group engagement team assessed the group’s internal control 
environment including controls in relation to its IT systems and controls to inform our risk assessment. The 
audit testing approach was wholly substantive.   
• 
 
Audit approach 
No. of 
components  
 
% coverage 
revenue   
 
% coverage loss 
before tax (on 
absolute basis)  
 
Full-scope audit 
3 (2023: 3) 
96 (2023: 83)  
47 (2023: 60) 
Specific-scope 
procedures  
- (2023: 1) 
- (2023: 11)  
- (2023: 3) 
Specified audit 
procedures 
3 (2023: 2)  
3  (2023: 4)  
50 (2023: 30) 
Analytical 
procedures 
8 (2023: 8)  
1 (2023: 2)  
3 (2023: 7) 
Total 
14 (2023: 14)  
100  
100 
Changes in approach from previous period 
• 
We performed specified audit procedures on the discontinued operation, which in the previous year was 
specific-scope procedures. 
Other information 
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements 
and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the 
annual report. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the 
extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is 
materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears 
to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we 
are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, 
based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other 
information, we are required to report that fact.  
We have nothing to report in this regard. 
Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 is unmodified 
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 
• 
the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which 
the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 

www.tekmargroup.com
116
www.tekmargroup.com
117
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
• 
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable 
legal requirements. 
Matter on which we are required to report under the Companies Act 2006 
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report or the 
directors’ report. 
Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 
requires us to report to you if, in our opinion: 
• 
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit 
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or 
• 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 
• 
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
• 
we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.  
Responsibilities of directors 
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 86, the directors are 
responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent 
company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and 
using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent 
company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our 
opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in 
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists.  
Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they 
could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial 
statements. 
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. The extent to which our 
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below:  
• 
We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that are applicable to the group and 
the parent company and determined that the most significant are applicable law and UK-adopted international 
accounting standards (for the group), United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (for the parent 
company) and UK corporation tax regulations. 
• 
We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks applicable to the company and the 
industry in which it operates through our general and commercial and sector experience, discussions with 
management and legal correspondence.  We also discussed the relevant frameworks with company legal 
advisors as appropriate.  
• 
We obtained an understanding of how the company is complying with those legal and regulatory frameworks 
by making inquiries of management and of those responsible for legal and compliance procedures. We 
corroborated our inquiries through our review of board minutes. 
 
 
 
 
• 
We assessed the susceptibility of the group's and the parent company’s financial statements to material 
misstatement, including how fraud might occur, by evaluating management's incentives and opportunities for 
manipulation of the financial statements. This included the evaluation of the risk of management override of 
controls. We determined that the principal risks were in relation to: 
- 
journal entries posted by senior finance personnel; 
- 
journal entries credited to the income statement above earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
amortisation (‘EBITDA’) and corresponding debit entry below EBITDA or to the balance sheet. 
- 
journal entries above a set threshold posted to revenue from an unexpected general ledger code; and 
- 
material post-close and consolidating journal entries;  
 
• 
Audit procedures performed by the engagement team included: 
 
evaluating the processes and controls established to address the risks related to irregularities and fraud;  
 
journal entry testing, in particular those journals determined to be in respect of our principal risk 
documented above; and  
 
challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in its significant accounting estimates. 
• 
These audit procedures were designed to provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements were 
free from fraud or error. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk 
of not detecting one resulting from error and detecting irregularities that result from fraud is inherently more 
difficult than detecting those that result from error, as fraud may involve collusion, deliberate concealment, 
forgery or intentional misrepresentations. Also, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations 
is from events and transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely we would become aware 
of it;  
• 
The engagement partner’s assessment of the appropriateness of the collective competence and capabilities 
of the engagement team including consideration of the engagement team's: 
- 
understanding of, and practical experience with, audit engagements of a similar nature and complexity 
through appropriate training and participation 
- 
knowledge of the industry in which the group and the parent company operate; and 
- 
understanding of the legal and regulatory requirements specific to the group and the parent company. 
• 
We had team communications in respect of potential non-compliance with laws and regulations and fraud 
including the potential for fraud in revenue recognition through manipulation of the forecast costs to complete 
and through incomplete contract liabilities. 
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial 
Reporting Council’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our 
auditor’s report. 
 
 

www.tekmargroup.com
118
www.tekmargroup.com
119
www.tekmargroup.com
 
 
 
 
Use of our report 
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members 
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the 
company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 
 
 
 
 
 
Victoria McLoughlin 
Senior Statutory Auditor 
for and on behalf of Grant Thornton UK LLP 
Statutory Auditor, Chartered Accountants 
Leeds 
3 March 2025 
 
 
Financial Statements 
Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income
Note
12M ended
30 Sep
2024
12M ended
30 Sep
2023
Restated 
£000
£000
Revenue
4
32,808
35,633
Cost of sales
6
(22,291)
(27,319)
Gross profit
10,517
8,314
Other administrative expenses
6
(13,195) 
(16,258)
Expected credit loss
16
(520)
-
Warranty provision
20
(656)
-
Total administrative expenses
(14,371)
(16,258)
Other operating income
22
18
Group operating loss
(3,832)
(7,926) 
Analysed as:
Adjusted EBITDA[1]
4
1,715
569
Depreciation
12
(1,277)
(1,172)
Amortisation
11
(366)
(586)
Exceptional Share based payments charges
26
(160)
(500)
Impairment of goodwill
11
(1,546)
(4,745)
Exceptional bonus payments
-
(296)
Exceptional IT costs
(169)
-
Foreign exchange (losses)/gains
(623)
(928)
Warranty provision
(656)
-
Expected credit loss
(520) 
-
Restructuring costs  
(230)
(268)
Group operating (Loss) 
(3,832)
(7,926)
Finance costs
(727)
(627)
Finance income
19
4
Net finance costs
7
(708)
(623)
(Loss) before taxation from continuing operations
(4,540)
(8,549)
Taxation
9
(557)
(201)
(Loss) for the period from continuing operation
(5,097)
(8,750)
Discontinued operations
27
(1,316)
(1,374)
(Loss) for the period
(6,413)
(10,124)
for the year ended 30 September 2024

www.tekmargroup.com
120
www.tekmargroup.com
121
www.tekmargroup.com
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income continued
Note
12M ended
30 Sep
2024
12M ended
30 Sep
2023
Restated
Items which will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Revaluation of property
75
-
Items which will be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Retranslation of overseas subsidiaries  
(333)
(281)
Total comprehensive loss for the period
(6,671)
(10,405)
Loss attributable to owners of the parent
(6,413)
(10,124)
Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent
(6,671)
(10,405)
(Loss) per share (pence) from continuing operations
Basic
10
(3.74)
(9.24)
Diluted
10
(3.74)
(9.24)
(Loss) per share (pence) from discontinued operations
Basic
10
(0.97)
(1.45)
Diluted
10
(0.97)
(1.45)
1: Adjusted EBITDA, which is defined as profit before net finance costs, tax, depreciation, amortisation, share based payments charge in 
relation to one-off awards, material items of a one-off nature and significant items which allow comparable business performance is a non-
GAAP metric used by management and is not an IFRS disclosure.
2: Comparative period has been restated to reclassify Subsea Innovation Limited results as discontinued operations.
3: The statement of other comprehensive income comparative period has been restated to remove equity settled share-based payments, 
which has increased the total comprehensive loss by £548,000. This credit entry has now been presented within transactions with owners in 
the statement of changes in equity. This has no impact on retained losses.
Financial Statements 
Consolidated Balance Sheet
Note
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
12
4,514
6,808
Goodwill and other intangibles
11
16,708
19,367
Investment property
13
2,842
-
Total non-current assets
24,064
26,175
Current assets
Inventory
15
1,878
2,127
Trade and other receivables
16
20,336
19,734
Cash and cash equivalents
17
4,630
5,219
Total current assets
26,844
27,080
Total assets
50,908
53,255
Equity and liabilities
Share capital
24
1,373
1,360
Share premium
72,202
72,202
Merger relief reserve
744
1,738
Merger reserve
(12,685)
(12,685)
Foreign currency translation reserve
(441)
(108)
Retained losses
(33,029)
(27,854)
Total equity 
28,164
34,653
Non-current liabilities
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
19
924
834
Trade and other payables
18
-
327
Deferred tax liability
21
234
503
Provisions   
20
656
-
Total non-current liabilities
1,814
1,664
as 30 September 2024
for the year ended 30 September 2024

www.tekmargroup.com
122
www.tekmargroup.com
123
www.tekmargroup.com
Consolidated Balance Sheet continued
Financial Statements 
Consolidated statement of 
changes in equity
Note
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
Current liabilities
Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
19
6,554
7,046
Trade and other payables
18
8,503
9,398
Corporation tax payable
647
29
Provisions
20
5,226
465
Total current liabilities
20,930
16,938
Total liabilities
22,744
18,602
Total equity and liabilities
50,908
53,255
The Group financial statements were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 3 March 2025 and 
were signed on its behalf by:
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer
Company registered number: 11383143
 
Share 
capital
Share 
premium
Merger 
relief 
reserve
Merger 
reserve
Foreign 
currency 
translation 
reserve
Retained 
losses
Total equity 
attributable to 
owners of the 
parent
Total 
equity
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
    
Balance at 1 October 
2022
609
67,653
1,738 (12,685)
173
(18,278)
39,210
39,210
Loss for the Period
-
-
-
-
-
(10,124)
(10,124) (10,124)
Exchange difference on 
translation of overseas 
subsidiary
-
-
-
-
(281)
-
(281)
(281)
Total comprehensive 
income for the year
-
-
-
-
(281)
(10,124)
(10,405) (10,405)
Share based payments   
-
-
-
-
-
548
548
548
Issue of shares
751
4,549
-
-
-
-
5,300
5,300
Total transactions with 
owners, recognised 
directly in equity
751
4,549
-
-
-
548
5,848
5,848
Balance at 30 
September 2023
1,360
72,202
1,738 (12,685)
(108)
(27,854)
34,653
34,653
Loss for the Period 
-
-
-
-
-
(6,413)
(6,413)
(6,413)
Revaluation of  property
-
-
-
-
-
75
75
75
Exchange difference on 
translation of overseas 
subsidiary
-
-
-
-
(333)
-
(333)
(333)
Total comprehensive 
(loss) for the year
-
-
-
-
(333)
(6,338)
(6,671)
(6,671)
Share based payments
-
-
-
-
-
169
169
169
Issue of shares, net of 
transaction costs
13
-
-
-
-
-
13
13
Total transactions with 
owners, recognised 
directly in equity
13
-
-
-
-
169
182
182
Transfer following 
disposal of subsidiary
-
(994)
-
-
994
-
-
Balance at 30 
September 2024
1,373
72,202
744 (12,685)
(441)
(33,029)
28,164
28,164
as 30 September 2024
for the year ended 30 September 2024

www.tekmargroup.com
124
www.tekmargroup.com
125
www.tekmargroup.com
Financial Statements 
Consolidated cash flow statement
12M ended 
30 Sep 2024
12M ended 
30 Sep 2023
£000
£000
Cash flows from operating activities
Loss before taxation
(5,856)
(9,923)
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
1,365
1,327
Amortisation of intangible assets
483
763
Loss on disposal of fixed assets
41
-
Share based payments charge
193
537
Loss on disposal of discontinued operations
1,316
-
Impairment of goodwill
1,546
4,745
Unrealised foreign gains
(276)
-
Finance costs
727
552
Finance income
(19)
(4)
(480)
(2,003)
Changes in working capital:
Decrease  in inventories
82
2,496
(Increase) in trade and other receivables
(2,533)
(6,360)
Increase / (decrease)  in trade and other payables
790
(272)
Increase  in provisions
5,439
465
Cash generated from / (used in) operations
3,298
(5,674)
Tax recovered 
-
-
Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities
3,298
(5,674)
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
(1,697)
(1,012)
Purchase of intangible assets
(235)
(310)
Proceeds on sale of property, plant and equipment
71
29
Proceeds/(outflows)   from sale of subsidiary
(112)
-
Interest received
19
4
Net cash (outflow) from investing activities
(1,954)
(1,289)
Cash flows from financing activities
Facility drawdown
Facility repayment
Repayment of borrowings under lease obligations
11,413
(11,805)
(436)
11,526
(11,941)
(414)
Shares issued
13
5,300
Interest paid
(795)
(505)
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities
(1,610)
3,966
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
(266)
(2,997)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Effect of foreign exchange rate changes
5,219
(322)
8,496
(280)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
4,630
5,219
Notes to the Group financial 
statements
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Tekmar Group plc (the “Company”) is a public limited 
company incorporated and domiciled in England and 
Wales. The registered office of the Company is Grindon 
Way, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 6SH. 
The registered company number is 11383143. 
The principal activity of the Company and its 
subsidiaries (together the “Group”) is that of design, 
manufacture and supply of subsea stability and 
protection technology, including associated subsea 
engineering services, operating across the global 
offshore energy markets, predominantly Offshore 
Wind.
Forward looking statements
Certain statements in this Annual report are forward 
looking. The terms “expect”, “anticipate”, “should be”, 
“will be” and similar expressions identify forward-
looking statements. Although the Board of Directors 
believes that the expectations reflected in these 
forward-looking statements are reasonable, such 
statements are subject to a number of risks and 
uncertainties and events could differ materially from 
those expressed or implied by these forward-looking 
statements.
2. BASIS OF PREPARATION AND ACCOUNTING 
POLICIES
The Group’s principal accounting policies have been 
applied consistently to all of the years presented, 
with the exception of the new standards applied for 
the first time as set out in paragraph (c) below where 
applicable.
(a) Basis of preparation
The results for the year ended 30 September 2024 
have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted 
International Accounting Standards (“IFRS”). The 
financial statements have been prepared on the going 
concern basis and on the historical cost convention 
modified for the revaluation of Investment property and 
Freehold property, and certain financial instruments. 
The comparative period represents 12 months to 30 
September 2023.
Tekmar Group plc (“the Company”) has adopted all 
IFRS in issue and effective for the year.
(a) Going concern
The Group meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through its available banking facilities 
which includes a CBILs loan of £3.0m currently 
available to 31 October 2025 and a trade loan facility 
of up to £4.0m that can be drawn against supplier 
payments, currently available to 31 July 2025.  The 
latter is provided with support of 80% from UKEF 
due to the nature of the business activities both in 
renewable energies and in driving growth through 
export lead opportunities. The Group held £4.6m of 
cash at 30 September 2024 including draw down of 
the £3.0m CBILS loan and a further £3.1m of the trade 
loan facility. There are no financial covenants that the 
Group must adhere to in either of the bank facilities.
The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts to 
31 March 2026.  The base case forecasts include 
assumptions for annual revenue growth supported 
by current order book, known tender pipeline, and by 
publicly available market predictions for the sector. 
The forecasts also assume a retention of the costs 
base of the business with increases of 5% on salaries 
and consistent gross   margin on contracts.  These 
forecasts show that the Group is expected to have 
a sufficient level of financial resources available 
to continue to operate on the assumption that the 
two facilities described are renewed and refinanced 
respectively. Within the base case model management 
have modelled the outflow of cash of £5.8m   in relation 
to note 20 Provisions within the going concern period 
which is offset against the corresponding insurance 
receivable within the same period, Management have 
not modelled anything in relation to the matter set out 
in note 20 Contingent Liabilities, as management have 
assessed there to be no present obligation.
for the year ended 30 September 2024
for the year ended 30 September 2024

www.tekmargroup.com
126
www.tekmargroup.com
127
www.tekmargroup.com
The Directors have sensitised their base case forecasts 
for a severe but plausible downside impact.  This 
sensitivity includes reducing revenue by 17% (£10m 
equivalent) for 18 month the period to 31 March 2026, 
to model the potential loss or delay of a certain level 
of contracts in the pipeline that form the base case 
forecast, and a further 5% increase in costs across the 
Group as a whole for the same period. In addition, the 
delays of specific cash receipts have been modelled. 
The base case and sensitised forecast also include 
discretionary spend on capital outlay. The Directors 
note there is further discretionary spend within their 
control which could be cut, if necessary, although this 
has not been modelled in the sensitised case given 
the headroom already available.  These sensitivities 
have been modelled to give the Directors comfort in 
adopting the going concern basis of preparation for 
these financial statements.  Further to this, a ‘reverse 
stress test’ was performed to determine at what point 
there would be a break in the model, the reverse stress 
test included reducing order intake by £15m (60% of 
unsecured revenue) and increasing overheads by 
7% against the base case. In addition, the delays of 
specific cash receipts have been modelled, this results 
in elimination of liquidity headroom in the final month 
in the going concern period. The severe but plausible 
case includes mitigating actions such as delayed 
capital expenditure spend.    
Facilities - Within the base case, severe but plausible 
case and reverse stress test, management have 
assumed the renewal of trade loan facility in July 2025 
and renewal or conversion of the CBILS loan into a 
term loan in October 2025. In the unlikely case that the 
facilities are not renewed, the Group would aim to take 
a number of co-ordinated actions designed to avoid 
the cash deficit   that would arise. 
The Directors are confident, based upon the 
communications with the team at Barclays, the 
historical strong relationship and recent bank facility 
renewal in November 2024, that these facilities will 
be renewed and will be available for the foreseeable 
future. The renewal of the two facilities in October 
2025 and July 2025 are yet to be formally agreed and 
the Group’s forecasts rely on their renewal.
Contract Award and timings – In the severe but plausible 
scenario, management has adjusted the base case 
forecast to account for the potential downside impact 
of order intake not being converted within the expected 
timescales. This adjustment results in a 17% reduction 
in revenue over the entire going concern period. This 
sensitised model shows that there is sufficient cash 
headroom to continue to operate the business.  
The Group operates on a contract basis and during 
the normal course of business, contracts are expected 
to be executed within specific timeframes during the 
forecast period.  If the Group fails to secure a number 
of significant contracts, in line with its forecasted 
timeframes, during a period of lower cash reserves 
cash headroom would be breached. Management 
does not consider this to be a likely outcome based 
on current backlog levels being representative of 
prior periods coupled with a strong pipeline visibility, 
opportunities at preferred supplier status and further 
anticipated contracts awards within the required 
timescales. Such contract awards would provide 
sufficient cash resources for the going concern period. 
Both the required renewal of the facilities and contract 
award timing represent events or conditions which 
would indicate a material uncertainty that may cast 
significant doubt on the Group’s and the parent 
company’s ability to continue as a going concern.  
The Directors are satisfied that, taking account 
of reasonably foreseeable changes in trading 
performance and on the basis that the bank facilities 
are renewed, these forecasts and projections show 
that the Group is expected to have a sufficient level of 
financial resources available through current facilities 
to continue in operational existence and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due for at least the next 12 months 
from the date of approval of the financial statements 
and for this reason they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the financial statements.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
(c) New standards, amendments and interpretations
The new standards, amendments or interpretations 
issued in the year, with which the Group has to comply 
with, have not had a significant effect impact on the 
Group.  There are no standards endorsed but not yet 
effective that will have a significant impact going 
forward.
(d) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has 
control. The Group controls an entity when the Group 
is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and has the ability to 
affect those returns through its power over the entity. 
Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on 
which control is transferred to the Group and are 
deconsolidated from the date control ceases.  Inter-
company transactions, balances and unrealised gains 
and losses on transactions between Group companies 
are eliminated.
(e) Revenue
Revenue (in both the offshore energy and the marine civils 
markets) arises from the supply of subsea protection 
solutions and associated equipment, principally through 
fixed fee contracts.   There are also technical consultancy 
services delivered through subsea energy.
To determine how to recognise revenue in line with IFRS 
15, the Group follows a 5-step process as follows:
1.	 Identifying the contract with a customer
2.	 Identifying the performance obligations
3.	 Determining the transaction price
4.	 Allocating the transaction price to the performance 
obligations
5.	 Recognising revenue when / as performance 
obligation(s) are satisfied
Revenue is measured at transaction price, stated net of 
VAT and other sales related taxes.
Revenue is recognised either at a point in time, or over-
time as the Group satisfies performance obligations by 
transferring the promised services to its customers as 
described below. 
(i) Fixed-fee contracted supply of subsea protection 
solutions
For the majority of revenue transactions, the Group enters 
individual contracts for the supply of subsea protection 
solutions, generally for a specific project in a particular 
geographic location. Each contract generally has one 
performance obligation, to supply subsea protection 
solutions. When the contracts meet one or more of the 
criteria within step 5, including the right to payment for the 
work completed, including profit    should the customer 
terminate, then revenue is recognised over time. If the 
criteria for recognising revenue over time is not met, 
revenue is recognised at a point in time, normally on the 
transfer of ownership of the goods to the customer. 
For contracts where revenue is recognised over time, an 
assessment is made as to the most accurate method 
to estimate stage of completion. This assessment is 
performed on a contract-by-contract basis to ensure that 
revenue most accurately represents the efforts incurred 
on a project.  For the majority of contracts this is on 
an inputs basis (costs incurred as a % of total forecast 
costs).  
There are also contracts which include the manufacture 
of a number of separately identifiable products.  In 
such circumstances, as the deliverables are distinct, 
each deliverable is deemed to meet the definition of a 
performance obligation in its own right and do not meet 
the definition under IFRS of a series of distinct goods or 
services given how substantially different each item is. 
Revenue for each item is stipulated in the contract and 
revenue is recognised over time as one or more of the 
criteria for over time recognition within IFRS 15 are met. 
Generally, for these items, an output method of estimating 
stage of completion is used as this gives the most 
accurate estimate of stage of completion. On certain 
contracts variation orders are received as the scope of 
contract changes, these variation orders are considered 
on a case by case basis to determine whether they form 
a seperate performance obligation in their own right or 
an addition to the orignial performance obligation. The 
same revenue recognition criteria discuss above is then 
applied to the variation order.

www.tekmargroup.com
128
www.tekmargroup.com
129
www.tekmargroup.com
In all cases, any advance billings are deferred and 
recognised as the service is delivered. 
(ii) Manufacture and distribution of ancillary products, 
equipment.
The Group also receives a proportion of its revenue 
streams through the sale of ancillary products and 
equipment. These individual sales are formed of 
individual purchase orders for which goods are 
ordered or made using inventory items. These items 
are recognised on a point in time basis, being the 
delivery of the goods to the end customer.
(iii) Provision of consultancy services
The entities within the offshore energy division 
also provide consultancy-based services whereby 
engineering support is provided to customers. These 
contracts meet one or more of the criteria within step 5, 
including the right to payment for the work completed, 
including profit should the customer terminate. 
Revenue is recognised over time on these contracts 
using the inputs method.
Tekmar Group plc applies the IFRS 15 Practical 
expedient in respects of determining the financing 
component of contract consideration: An entity need 
not adjust the promised amount of consideration for 
the effects of a significant financing component if the 
entity expects, at contract inception, that the period 
between when the entity transfers a promised good or 
service to a customer and when the customer pays for 
that good or service will be one year or less.
Accounting for revenue is considered to be a key 
accounting judgement which is further explained in 
note 3.
(f) EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA
Earnings before Interest, Taxation, Depreciation and 
Amortisation (“EBITDA”) and Adjusted EBITDA are non-
GAAP measures used by management to assess the 
operating performance of the Group. EBITDA is defined 
as profit before net finance costs, tax, depreciation 
and amortisation.  Material items of a one-off nature 
or of such significance they are considered relevant to 
the user of the financial statements and share based 
payment charge in relation to one-off awards are 
excluded.
The Directors primarily use the Adjusted EBITDA 
measure when making decisions about the Group’s 
activities. As these are non-GAAP measures, EBITDA 
and Adjusted EBITDA measures used by other entities 
may not be calculated in the same way and hence are 
not directly comparable.
(g) Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into 
the Group’s presentational currency at the foreign 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies at the balance sheet date are translated 
at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. 
Non-monetary items carried at fair value that are 
denominated in foreign currencies are translated at 
the rates prevailing at the date when the fair value was 
determined. Non-monetary items that are measured in 
terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are not 
retranslated. Foreign exchange differences arising on 
translation are recognised in the Statement of Other 
Comprehensive Income.
(h) Classification of instruments issued by the Group
Instruments issued by the Group are treated as equity 
(i.e. forming part of shareholders’ funds) only to the 
extent that they meet the following two conditions:
•	
they include no contractual obligations upon the 
Group to deliver cash or other financial assets or 
to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities 
with another party under conditions that are 
potentially unfavourable to the Group; and
•	
where the instrument will or may be settled in the 
Company’s own equity instruments, it is either a 
non-derivative that includes no obligation to deliver 
a variable number of the Company’s own equity 
instruments or is a derivative that will be settled by 
the Company exchanging a fixed amount of cash 
or other financial assets for a fixed number of its 
own equity instruments.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
To the extent that this definition is not met, the items are 
classified as a financial liability. Where the instrument 
so classified takes the legal form of the Company’s 
own shares, the amounts presented in these financial 
statements for called up share capital and share 
premium account exclude amounts in relation to those 
shares.
Finance payments associated with financial liabilities 
are dealt with as part of finance expenses. Finance 
payments associated with financial instruments that 
are classified in equity are dividends and are recorded 
directly in equity.
(i) Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost 
less accumulated depreciation and any recognised 
impairment loss with the exception of Freehold Property 
Properties   whose fair value can be   measured reliably 
are held under the revaluation model and are carried at a 
revalued amount, being fair value at the date of valuation 
less any subsequent accumulated depreciation and 
subsequent impairment losses. The fair value of land 
and building is considered to be their market value.
Revaluation gains and losses are recognised in other 
comprehensive income and accumulated in equity, 
except to the extent that a revaluation gain reverses a 
revaluation loss previously recognised in profit or loss, or 
a revaluation loss exceeds the accumulated revaluation 
gains recognised in equity; such gains and losses are 
recognised in profit or loss. 
Leased property is accounted for as a “right-of-use” asset 
under IFRS 16 Leases.  The initial value of a right-of-use 
asset is determined by the value of the lease liability.
Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to profit or loss over the 
estimated useful lives of each part of an item of 
property, plant and equipment. Depreciation is 
provided on the following basis:
Freehold property
50 years straight line
Leasehold improvements
Over the life of the 
lease
Plant and equipment
3 years straight line 
or 6 years reducing 
balance or 15–25% 
straight line
Fixtures & fittings
4 years straight line
Motor vehicles
4 years reducing 
balance or straight 
line
Computer equipment
4 years straight line
IFRS16 ROU Assets
In line with lease term
It has been assumed that all assets will be used until 
the end of their economic life.
(j) Investment property
Investment property is property held to earn rentals 
and is accounted for using the fair value model.
Investment property is revalued annually with 
resulting gains and losses recognised in Statement 
of Comprehensive Income. This is included in the 
consolidated statement of financial position and their 
fair values. See note 13.
(k) Intangible assets 
Goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for by 
applying the purchase method. Goodwill represents 
the difference between the cost of the acquisition 
and the fair value of the net identifiable assets 
acquired. Identifiable intangibles are those which 
can be sold separately, or which arise from legal or 
contractual rights regardless of whether those rights 
are separable and are initially recognised at fair value. 
Other identified intangible assets include customer 
relationships and brands. These are amortised on 
a straight-line basis over the useful economic lives, 
which are estimated to be 3 and 10 years respectively.
Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated 
impairment losses. In cases where the fair value 
of the net identifiable assets exceeds the cost 
of acquisition, negative goodwill arises which is 
recorded immediately in the income statement. 
Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units and is 
not amortised but is tested annually for impairment.

www.tekmargroup.com
130
www.tekmargroup.com
131
www.tekmargroup.com
Research and Product Development costs
Research costs are charged to the income statement 
in the year in which they are incurred and are presented 
within operating expenses. Internal development costs 
that are incurred during the development of significant 
and separately identifiable new technology are 
capitalised when the following criteria are met:
•	
It is technically feasible to complete the 
technological development so that it will be 
available for use;
•	
Management intends to complete the technological 
development and use or sell it;
•	
It can be demonstrated how the technological 
development 
will 
develop 
probable 
future 
economic benefits;
•	
Adequate technical, financial, and other resources 
to complete the development and to use or sell the 
product are available; and
•	
Expenditure attributable to the technological 
product during its development can be reliably 
measured.
Capitalised development costs include costs of 
materials and direct labour costs. Internal costs that 
are capitalised are limited to incremental costs specific 
to the project. 
Other development expenditures that do not meet 
these criteria are recognised as an expense as incurred 
and presented within operating expenses, together 
with any amortisation which is charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis over the estimated 
useful lives of product development intangible assets 
of 2-5 years.
Computer software
Computer software purchased separately, that does 
not form an integral part of related hardware, is 
capitalised at cost.
Amortisation 
is 
charged 
to 
Statement 
of 
Comprehensive Income on a straight-line basis over 
the estimated useful lives and is presented within 
operating expenses. The useful life of computer 
software is 3 years.
(l) Impairment
Goodwill is not amortised but is reviewed for 
impairment at least annually, or when there is an 
indication of impairment. Intangible assets which are 
not yet available for use are tested for impairment 
annually. For other assets, the recoverable amount 
is only estimated when there is an indication that 
an impairment may have occurred. The recoverable 
amount is the higher of fair value less costs to sell 
and value in use.
An impairment loss is recognised whenever the 
carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating 
unit exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment 
losses are recognised in profit or loss.
Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash-
generating units are allocated first to reduce the 
carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to the cash-
generating unit and then to reduce the carrying amount 
of the other assets in the unit on a pro rata basis. A 
cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable Group 
of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely 
independent of the cash inflows from other assets or 
Groups of assets.
(m) Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and 
estimated selling price less costs to complete and 
sell. Cost is calculated on a first in first out basis 
and includes the cost of acquiring raw materials. 
Provision is made for any foreseeable losses where 
appropriate. 
(n) Defined contribution plans
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution 
pension plans are recognised as an expense in profit 
or loss as incurred. 
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
(o) Provisions and contingent liabilities
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when 
the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation 
as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an 
outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle 
the obligation. If the effect is material, provisions 
are determined by discounting the expected future 
cash flows at pre-tax rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and, where 
appropriate, the risks specific to the liability.
A contingent liability is a possible obligation that 
arises from past events and whose existence will be 
confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence 
of one or more uncertain future events not wholly 
within the control of the entity. A contingent liability is 
a disclosure in the notes to the financial statements 
only. 
(p) Leases
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether 
a contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or 
contains, a lease if the contract conveys the right to 
control the use of an identified asset for a period of 
time in exchange for consideration.
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease 
liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-
use asset is initially measured at cost, which comprises 
the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any 
lease payments made at or before the commencement 
date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an 
estimate of costs to restore the underlying asset, less 
any lease incentives received. 
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated 
using the straight-line method from the commencement 
date to the earlier of the end of the useful life of the 
right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. In 
addition, the right-of-use asset is periodically reduced 
by impairment losses, if any, and adjusted for certain 
remeasurements of the lease liabilities.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present 
value of lease payments that were not paid at the 
commencement date, discounted using the Group’s 
incremental borrowing rate. 
The lease liability is measured at amortised cost 
using the effective interest method. If there is a 
remeasurement of the lease liability, a corresponding 
adjustment is made to the carrying amount of the right-
of-use asset or is recorded directly in profit or loss if 
the carrying amount of the right of use asset is zero.
The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use 
assets and lease liabilities for short-term leases that 
have a lease term of less than 12 months or leases of 
low value assets. These lease payments are expensed 
on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
(q) Net financing costs
Net financing costs comprise interest payable and 
interest receivable on funds invested. Interest income 
and interest payable are recognised in profit or loss as 
they accrue using the effective interest method.
(r) Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the period comprises current 
and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in profit or loss 
except to the extent that it relates to items recognised 
in other comprehensive income or directly in equity, 
in which case it is recognised in other comprehensive 
income or in equity, respectively.
Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable 
income for the year, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and 
any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous 
years.
Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences 
between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used 
for taxation purposes, except to the extent that it arises 
on:
•	
the initial recognition of goodwill;
•	
the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that 
affect neither accounting nor taxable profit other 
than in a business combination;
•	
differences relating to investments in subsidiaries 
to the extent that they will probably not reverse in 
the foreseeable future.
The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the 
expected manner of realisation or settlement of the 
carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax 
rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date.

www.tekmargroup.com
132
www.tekmargroup.com
133
www.tekmargroup.com
A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent 
that it is probable that future taxable profits will be 
available against which the asset can be utilised.
(s) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances 
and call deposits.  
(t) Financial instruments
Financial assets
Non-derivative financial assets are classified as 
either financial assets at amortised cost, fair value 
through profit or loss and fair value through other 
comprehensive income. The Group derecognises a 
financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash 
flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the rights 
to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction 
in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of 
ownership of the financial asset are transferred. The 
basis of classification depends on the Group’s business 
model and the contractual cash flow characteristics of 
the financial asset. All financial assets of the Group 
are held at amortised cost, which the exception of 
derivative financial instruments which are held at 
FVTPL. 
Financial assets include trade and other receivables 
and cash and cash equivalents. Trade and other 
receivables are amounts due from customers for 
services performed in the ordinary course of business. 
If collection is expected in one year or less (or in the 
normal operating cycle of the business if longer), 
they are classified as current assets. If not, they are 
presented as non-current assets.
Trade and other receivables are initially recorded 
at transaction price and thereafter are measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest rate. A loss 
allowance for expected credit losses on trade and 
other receivables and contract assets is measured at 
an amount equal to the lifetime expected credit losses. 
Lifetime expected credit losses are the expected 
credit losses that will result from all possible default 
events over the expected life of a financial instrument. 
This assessment is performed on a collective basis 
considering forward-looking information. The Group 
considers a financial asset to be in default when the 
receivable is unlikely to pay its credit obligations to the 
Group in full without recourse by the Group to actions 
such as realising security (if any is held).
Financial liabilities
Non-derivative 
financial 
liabilities 
are 
initially 
recognised at fair value less any directly attributable 
transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
these liabilities are measured at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method. The Group’s borrowings, 
finance leases, trade and most other payables fall into 
this category of financial instruments.
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its 
contractual obligations are discharged, cancelled, or 
expire.
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially 
at fair value less attributable transaction costs. 
Subsequent to initial recognition, interest-bearing 
borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any 
difference between cost and redemption value 
being recognised in profit or loss over the year of the 
borrowings on an effective interest basis. 
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or 
services that have been acquired in the ordinary course 
of business from suppliers and are initially recorded at 
fair value and thereafter at amortised cost using the 
effective interest rate method.
Financial derivatives
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to 
hedge its exposure to risks arising from operational 
activities, principally foreign exchange risk. In 
accordance with treasury policy, the Group does not 
hold or issue derivative financial instruments for trading 
purposes. The Group does not hedge account for these 
items. Any gain or loss arising from derivative financial 
instruments is based on changes in fair value, which 
is determined by direct reference to active market 
transactions or using a valuation technique where no 
active market exists. At certain times the Group has 
foreign currency forward contracts that fall into this 
category. Movement in fair value is recognised in profit 
and loss.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
(u) Contract assets
Contract assets represent the gross unbilled amount 
for contract work performed to date, calculated by way 
of units assembled using either the input or output 
method – refer policy (e). They are presented as part 
of “trade and other receivables” in the balance sheet. 
If payments received from customers exceed the 
income recognised, then the difference is presented 
as “accruals and contract liabilities” in the balance 
sheet.
(v) Segmental reporting
The Group reports its business activities across 
Offshore Energy and Marine Civils and this is reported 
in a manner consistent with the internal reporting to 
the Board of Directors, which has been identified as 
the chief operating decision maker. The Board of 
Directors consists of the Executive Directors and the 
Non-Executive Directors. Project performance is also 
monitored by both business entities and by Offshore 
Wind and Subsea markets to provide differing 
perspectives.
(w) Share capital
Share capital represents the nominal value of shares 
that have been issued.
(x) Share premium
Share premium includes any premiums received 
on issue of share capital. Any transaction costs 
associated with the issuing of shares are deducted 
from share premium, net of any related income tax 
benefits.
(y) Merger reserve and Merger relief reserve
The merger reserve and the merger relief reserve 
were created as a result of the share for share 
exchange under which Tekmar Group plc became 
the parent undertaking prior to the IPO. Under merger 
accounting principles, the assets and liabilities of 
the subsidiaries were consolidated at book value in 
the Group financial statements and the consolidated 
reserves of the Group were adjusted to reflect the 
statutory share capital, share premium and other 
reserves of the Company as if it had always existed, 
with the difference presented as the merger reserve.
The Merger relief reserve was created on acquisition 
of Pipeshield International Limited and Subsea 
Innovation Limited as a result of part of the 
consideration being settle in equity of the plc.
(z) Translation reserve
For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial 
statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s 
foreign operations are translated at exchange rates 
prevailing on the statement of financial position 
date. Income and expense items are translated at 
the average exchange rates for the period, unless 
exchange rates fluctuate significantly during that 
period, in which case the exchange rates at the date 
of transactions are used. Exchange differences 
arising, if any, are recognised in other comprehensive 
income and accumulated in equity. On consolidation, 
the results of overseas operations are translated 
into pounds sterling at rates approximating to those 
ruling when the transactions took place. All assets 
and liabilities of overseas operations are translated 
at the rate ruling at the statement of financial position 
date. Exchange differences arising on translating the 
opening net assets at opening rate and the results 
of overseas operations at actual rate are recognised 
directly in other comprehensive income and are 
credited/(debited) to the translation reserve.
(aa) Own shares held by ESOP trust
Transactions of the Group-sponsored ESOP trust are 
treated as being those of the Group and are therefore 
reflected in the financial statements. In particular, the 
trust’s purchases and sales of shares in the Group are 
debited and credited to equity.
(ab) Retained losses  
Retained earnings includes all current and prior year 
retained profits and losses.
(a) Share based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share-based 
remuneration plans for certain employees. None of 
the Group’s plans are cash-settled. All goods and 
services received in exchange for the grant of any 
share-based payment are measured at their fair 
values.

www.tekmargroup.com
134
www.tekmargroup.com
135
www.tekmargroup.com
Where employees are rewarded using share-based 
payments, the fair value of employees’ services is 
determined indirectly by reference to the fair value 
of the equity instruments granted. This fair value is 
appraised at the grant date and excludes the impact of 
non-market vesting conditions.
All share-based remuneration is ultimately recognised 
as an expense in profit or loss with a corresponding 
credit to retained earnings. If vesting years or other 
vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over 
the vesting year, based on the best available estimate 
of the number of share options expected to vest.
3. CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND 
ESTIMATES
The preparation of the Group financial statements 
under IFRS requires the Directors to make estimates 
and assumptions that affect the reported amounts 
of assets and liabilities. Estimates and judgements 
are continually evaluated and are based on historical 
experience and other factors including expectations 
of future events that are believed to be reasonable 
under the circumstances. Actual results may differ 
from these estimates. 
The Directors consider that the following estimates 
and judgements are likely to have the most significant 
effect on the amounts recognised in the Group 
financial statements. 
(a) Critical judgements in applying the entity’s 
accounting policies
Revenue recognition
Judgement is applied in determining the most 
appropriate method to apply in respect of recognising 
revenue over-time as the service is performed using 
either the input or output method. Further details on 
how the policy is applied can be found in note 2(e).
(b) Critical accounting estimates
Revenue recognition – stage of completion when 
recognising revenue overtime
Revenue on contracts is recognised based on the 
stage of completion of a project, which, when using 
the input method, is measured as a proportion of costs 
incurred out of total forecast costs. Forecast costs to 
complete each project are therefore a key estimate 
in the financial statements and can be inherently 
uncertain due to changes in market conditions.  For the 
partially complete projects in Tekmar Energy at year 
end if the percentage completion was 1% different to 
management’s estimate the revenue impact would be 
£116,830. Within Pipeshield International there were 
a number of projects in progress over the year end 
and a 1% movement in the estimate of completion 
would impact revenue by £36,940  . However, the 
likelihood of errors in estimation is small, as the 
businesses have a history of reliable estimation of 
costs to complete and given the nature of production, 
costs to complete estimate are relatively simple.
Recoverability of contract assets and receivables
Management judges the recoverability at the balance 
sheet date and makes a provision for impairment 
where appropriate. The resultant provision for 
impairment represents management’s best estimate 
of losses incurred in the portfolio at the balance 
sheet date, assessed on the customer risk scoring 
and commercial discussions. Further, management 
estimate the recoverability of any accrued income 
balances relating to customer contracts. This 
estimate includes an assessment of the probability of 
receipt, exposure to credit loss and the value of any 
potential recovery. Management base this estimate 
using the most recent and reliable information that 
can be reasonably obtained at any point of review. 
The Group have recognised a credit loss provision in 
relation to a specific historic aged trade receivable 
(See note 16) 
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Impairment of non-current assets 
Management conducts annual impairment reviews of 
the Group’s non-current assets on the consolidated 
statement of financial position. This includes goodwill 
annually, development costs where IAS 36 requires 
it, and other assets as the appropriate standards 
prescribe. Any impairment review is conducted 
using the Group’s future growth targets regarding 
its key markets of offshore energy and marine civils. 
Sensitivities are applied to the growth assumptions 
to consider any potential long-term impact of current 
economic conditions. Provision is made where the 
recoverable amount is less than the current carrying 
value of the asset. Further details as to the estimation 
uncertainty and the key assumptions are set out in 
note 11.
Provision for warranty costs and recognition of 
related insurance income
In accordance   with IAS 37, the company recognises 
a provision   when it has a present obligation as a 
result of past events, it is probable that an outflow 
of resources will be required to settle the obligation, 
and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of 
the obligation. The estimation and calculation of the 
value of provisions involves significant judgement, 
particularly in determining the likelihood, cost and 
timing of warranty related issues  .
Additionally, the company may receive insurance 
receipts to cover certain warranty claims. These 
receipts are recognised as an asset only when it is 
virtually certain that reimbursement will be received 
if the company settles the obligation. The timing and 
amount of such receipts can be uncertain, requiring 
careful assessment and judgement to ensure 
accurate financial reporting. Post year end, the Group 
had £5.2m of cash receipts from insurance in relation 
to warranty related matters. The Group recognised 
this balance within other receivables on the balance 
sheet at the financial year end.
4.    REVENUE AND SEGMENTAL REPORTING 
Management has determined the operating segments 
based upon the information provided to the Board 
of Directors which is considered the chief operation 
decision maker. The Group is managed and reports 
internally by business division and market for the year 
ended 30 September 2024. 
Major customers 
In the year ended 30 September 2024 there were two 
major customers within the Group that individually 
accounted for at least 10% of total revenues (2023: 
three customers). The revenues relating to these in 
the year to 30 September 2024 were £11,085,000 
(2023: £13,913,000). Included within this is revenue 
from multiple projects with different entities within 
the Group.

www.tekmargroup.com
136
www.tekmargroup.com
137
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Analysis of revenue by region
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated
£000
£000
UK & Ireland
5,836
7,683
Germany
439
1,133
Turkey
-
983
Italy
101
-
Other Europe
413
1,152
USA & Canada
555
3,006
China
665
1,676
Japan
102
1,083
Philippines
-
1,157
Taiwan
7,696
-
South Korea
828
-
Qatar
5,222
8,036
KSA
4,674
6,888
UAE
2,695
-
Abu Dhabi
225
-
Africa
2,129
-
India
543
-
Other Middle East
40
904
Rest of the World
645
1,932
32,808
35,633
Analysis of revenue by market
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated
£000
£000
Offshore Wind
17,100
17,658
Other offshore
15,708
17,975
32,808
35,633
Analysis of revenue by product category
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated
£000
£000
Offshore Energy protection systems & equipment
17,916
15,844
Marine Civils
13,688
18,320
Engineering consultancy services  
1,204
1,469
32,808
35,633
Note – Engineering consultancy services forms part of the offshore energy segment.
Analysis of revenue by recognition point
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated
£000
£000
Point in Time
1,889
3,252
Over Time
30,919
32,381
32,808
35,633
At 30 September 2024, the Group had a total transaction price £15,471k (  2023: £19,462k) allocated to 
performance obligations on contracts which were unsatisfied or partially unsatisfied at the end of the 
reporting period. The amount of revenue recognised in the reporting year to 30 September 24 which was 
previously recorded in contract liabilities was £2,790k (2023: £3,188k).
Adjusted EBITDA is measured by division and the Board reviews this on the following basis.

www.tekmargroup.com
138
www.tekmargroup.com
139
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Offshore 
Energy 
2024
Marine 
Civils 
2024
Group/
Eliminations
Total 
2024
£000
£000
£000
£000
Revenue
19,465
13,343
-
32,808
Inventory recognised as an expense
(9,842)
(7,059)
-
(16,901)
Other cost of sales
(3,900)
(1,490)
-
(5,390)
Gross profit
5,724
4,793
-
10,517
% Gross profit
29%
36%
-
32%
Administrative expenses
(6,962)
(3,078)
(3,155)
(13,195)
Warranty provision
(656)
-
-
(656)
Expected credit loss
(520)
-
-
(520)
Other operating income
1
9
12
22
Operating profit / (loss) from continuing 
operations
(2,413)
1,724
(3,143)
(3,832)
Analysed as:
Adjusted EBITDA
1,702
2,582
(2,569)
1,715
Depreciation
(811)
(454)
(12)
(1,277)
Amortisation
(268)
-
(98)
(366)
Exceptional share based payment charges
(46)
(6)
(108)
(160)
Impairment of goodwill
(1,546)
-
-
(1,546)
Exceptional IT costs
(46)
-
(123)
(169) 
Foreign exchange losses
(222)
(398)
(3)
(623)
Warranty provision
(656)
-
-
(656)
Expected credit loss
(520)
-
-
(520)
Restructuring costs
-
-
(230  ) 
(230)
Operating profit / (loss) from continuing 
operations
(2,413)
1,724
(3,143)
(3,832)
Finance income
18
1
-
19
Finance costs
(74)
(6)
(647)
(727)
Tax
(496)
(334)
273
(557)
(Loss) / profit after tax from continuing 
operations
(2,965)
1,385
(3,517)
(5,097)
Offshore 
Energy 
2024
Marine 
Civils 
2024
Group/ 
Eliminations
Total 
2024
£000
£000
£000
£000
Other information
Reportable segment assets
17,119
11,405
22,384
50,908
Reportable segment liabilities
(12,022)
(3,673)
(7,249)
(22,944)
The goodwill and other intangible assets allocated to Group for the purposes of internal reporting are 
£13,903k for Offshore Energy and £2,805k for Marine Civils.

www.tekmargroup.com
140
www.tekmargroup.com
141
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Offshore 
Energy 
2023 
Restated
Marine 
Civils 
2023
Restated
Group/
Elimination  s
Total 
2023
Restated
£000
£000
£000
£000
Revenue
17,313
18,320
-
35,633
Inventory recognised as an expense
(12,272)
(12,166)
-
(24,438)
Other cost of sales
(2,053)
(828)
-
(2,881)
Gross profit
2,988
5,326
-
8,314
% Gross profit
17%
29%
-
23%
Administrative expenses
(11,185)
(2,528)
(2,545)
(16,258)
Other operating income
6
-
12
18
Operating (loss)/ profit from continuing 
operations
(8,191)
2,798
(2,533)
(7,926)
Analysed as:
Adjusted EBITDA
(1,195)
3,544
(1,780)
569
Depreciation
(862)
(298)
(12)
(1,172)
Amortisation
(418)
-
(168)
(586)
Exceptional share based payment charges
(55)
(82)
(363)
(500)
Impairment of goodwill
(4,745)
-
-
(4,745)
Exceptional bonus payments
(180)
(34)
(82)
(296)
Foreign exchange gains/(losses)
(675)
(255)
2
(928)
Restructuring costs
(61)
(77)
(130)
(268)
Operating (loss)/ profit
(8,191)
2,798
(2,533)
(7,926)
Finance income
3
1
-
4
Finance costs
(48)
(10)
(569)
(627)
Tax
521
(789)
67
(201)
(Loss) / profit from continuing operations
(7,715)
2,000
(3,035)
(8,750)
Offshore 
Energy 
2023 
Restated
Marine 
Civils 
2023 
Restated
Group/
Eliminations
Total 2023
Restated
£000
£000
£000
£000
Other information
Reportable segment assets
17,391
10,169
25,695
53,255
Reportable segment liabilities
(8,175)
(3,208)
(7,219)
(18,602)
Note - Comparative figures have been restated to remove Subsea Innovation Limited as reclassified as 
discontinued operations.
5.EMPLOYEES AND DIRECTORS
(a) Staff numbers and costs
The average number of persons employed by the Group (including directors) during the period, analysed by 
category, was as follows:
2024
2023 
Restated 
 
No
No
Directors
7
6
Sales
6
7
Administration
48
49
Technical
32
34
Direct labour
41
38
 
133
134
Staff costs for the Group during the period were: 
12M ending 30 
Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated 
 
£000
£000
Wages and salaries
6,654
6,983
Social security costs
760
698
Defined contribution pension cost
365
313
Share based payments (note 25)
191
658
 
7,970
8,652
(b) 	
Key management compensation 
Key management of the Group is considered to be the Board of Directors. Remuneration paid to the 
Directors is as follows:
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023 
Restated
£000
£000
Short term benefits:
Salaries including bonuses
839
891
Social security costs
102
110
Total short-term benefits
941
1,001
Post-employment benefits:
Defined contribution pension plan
42
30
Total remuneration
983
1,031
Share options were awarded in the year, see note 26 for details of share option plans. 

www.tekmargroup.com
142
www.tekmargroup.com
143
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Director 
remuneration
Basic 
salary / 
fees
Share 
awards
Social 
security
Bonus
Company 
Pension 
contributions
FY24 
Total
FY23 
Total
Name of Director
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
A MacDonald
241
67
41
-
-
349
486
J Brown
83
-
13
-
13
94
69
D Bulmer
-
-
-
-
-
-
122
I Ritchey
69
-
7
-
7
83
38
D Wilkinson
46
-
11
40
-
97
41
L Wilkinson
168
10
22
-
19
219
234
C Welsh
40
-
4
-
-
44
20
S Lockard
53
-
-
-
-
53
21
DM Kemp
6
-
1
-
-
7
-
LB Krogsgaard
6
-
-
-
-
6
-
R Turner
25
-
3
-
3
31
-
Highest paid director
The aggregate remuneration of the highest paid Director was £349,000 (2023: £486,000), which includes 
pension contributions of £nil (2023: £nil), and accrued bonus costs of £nil (2023: £nil). The number of 
Directors accruing pension benefits under a defined contribution plan was four (2023: four).
Note - Comparative figures have been restated to remove Subsea Innovation Limited as reclassified as 
discontinued operations.
6. EXPENSES BY NATURE
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024
12M ending
30 Sep 2023
Restated
 
£000
£000
Employee benefit expense
7,970
8,652
Amortisation 
366
586
Depreciation – leased 
494
437
Depreciation – owned 
783
735
Inventory recognised as an expense
16,901
24,438 
Foreign exchange losses
623
924
Other expenses 
6,803
3,060
Warranty provision
656
-
Expected credit loss
520
-
Impairment of Goodwill
1,546
4,745
Total cost of sales and administrative expenses
36,662
43,577
Note - Comparative figures have been restated to remove Subsea Innovation Limited as reclassified as 
discontinued operations.
7.	
NET FINANCE COSTS 
12M ending
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023
Restated
£000
£000
Interest payable and similar charges
On other loans
727
627
Total interest payable and similar charges
727
627
Interest receivable and similar income
Interest receivable
19
4
Total interest receivable and similar income
19
4
Net finance costs
708
623
Interest expense on lease liabilities was £78,000 (2023: £49,000).
Note - Comparative figures have been restated to remove Subsea Innovation Limited as reclassified as 
discontinued operations.

www.tekmargroup.com
144
www.tekmargroup.com
145
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
8. AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION 
During the year the Group obtained the following services from the Company’s auditors at costs as detailed 
below:
12M ending
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023
 
£000
£000
Fees payable to Company’s auditor for the audit of the parent 
company financial statements
159
145
Fees payable to Company’s auditor for other services: 
– The audit of Company’s subsidiaries
100
100
– Other non-audit services
8
8
 
267
253
9. TAXATION 
Analysis of credit in year
12M ending
30 Sep 2024
12M ending 
30 Sep 2023
£’000
£’000
Current tax
Current taxation charge for the year
305
-
Adjustments in respect of prior periods
313
-
Total current tax
618
-
Deferred tax
Origination and reversal of timing differences
(61)
201
Adjustments in respect of prior periods
-
-
Total deferred tax
(61)
201
Tax on (loss) on ordinary activities
557
201
Reconciliation of total tax charge:
(Loss) on ordinary activities before tax
(4,540)
(9,923)
(Loss) on ordinary activities multiplied by the rate of 
corporation tax in the UK of 25% (2023: 22%)
(1,217)
(2,183)
Effects of:
Fixed asset timing differences
(59)
-
Non-deductible expenses
473
1,637
Non-taxable income
(3)
-
Enhanced R&D tax relief
-
(290)
Adjustments in relation to prior periods
313
-
Impact of unrecognised deferred tax assets
1,050
1,037
Total taxation charge
557
201
Factors that may affect future tax charges
Following the Governments announcement in October 2022 to increase the corporation tax rate to 25% from 
19% with effect from April 2023, deferred tax has been calculated at a rate of 25%. Our expectation is that 
the Group will utilise its losses in future accounting periods at the higher rate. See note 20 Deferred Tax.
10. EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to equity shareholders by the weighted average 
number of ordinary shares in issue. Diluted earnings per share are calculated by including the impact of all conditional share 
awards.
The calculation of basic and diluted profit per share is based on the following data:
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
Continuing 
operations
Discontinued 
operations
Continuing 
operations
Discontinued 
operations
Earnings (£000)
Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted 
earnings per share being profit/(loss) for the year 
attributable to equity shareholders
(5,097)
(1,316)
(8,750)
(1,374)
Number of shares 
Weighted average number of shares for the 
purposes of basic earnings per share
136,305,536
136,305,536
94,694,962
94,694,962
Weighted average dilutive effect of conditional 
share awards
8,281,261
8,281,261
4,346,203
4,346,203
Weighted average number of shares for the 
purposes of diluted earnings per share
144,586,797
144,586,797
99,041,165
99,041,165
Profit per ordinary share (pence)
Basic profit per ordinary share
(3.74)
(0.97)
(9.24)
(1.45)
Diluted profit per ordinary share
(3.74)
(0.97)
(9.24)
(1.45)
Adjusted loss per ordinary share (pence)*
(1.00)
(0.97)
(3.19)
(1.30)
The calculation of adjusted earnings per share is based on the following data:
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
Continuing 
operations
Discontinued 
operations
Continuing 
operations
Discontinued 
operations
£000
£000
£000
£000
(Loss) for the period attributable to equity 
shareholders
(5,097)
(1,316)
(8,750)
(1,374)
Add back:
Impairment of goodwill
1,546
-
4,745
-
Amortisation on acquired intangible assets
98
-
168
-
Exceptional share based payment
160
-
508
-
Exceptional staff costs (restructuring/bonus)
230
-
296
134
Exceptional IT costs
169
-
-
-
Warranty provision
656
-
-
-
Expected credit loss
520
-
-
-
Tax effect on above
351
-
22
-
Adjusted earnings
(1,367)
(1,316)
(3,011)
(1,240)
*Adjusted earnings per share is calculated as profit for the period adjusted for amortisation as a result of business combinations, one off items, share based 
payments and the tax effect of these at the effective rate of corporation tax, divided by the closing number of shares in issue at the Balance Sheet date.  This is 
the measure most commonly used by analysts in evaluating the business’ performance and therefore the Directors have concluded this is a meaningful adjusted 
EPS measure to present.

www.tekmargroup.com
146
www.tekmargroup.com
147
www.tekmargroup.com
Goodwill has been tested for impairment. The method, key assumptions and results of the impairment 
review are detailed below:
Goodwill is attributed to the CGU being the division in which the goodwill has arisen. The Group has 2 CGUs 
and the goodwill related to each CGU as disclosed below.
Goodwill
2024
£000
2023
£000
Offshore Energy Division   
13,218
14,848
Marine Civils Division
2,590
2,590
Goodwill is allocated to two CGUs being Offshore Energy and Marine Civils. Goodwill has been tested for 
impairment by assessing the value in use of the cash generating unit. The value in use has been calculated 
using budgeted cash flow projections for the next 5 years. The forecasts have been compiled at individual 
CGU level with the  first year modelled around the known contracts which the entities have already secured 
or are in an advanced stage of securing. A targeted revenue stream based on historic revenue run rates 
has then been incorporated into the cashflows to model contracts that are as yet unidentified that are 
likely be won and completed in the year. The forecasts for years 2 to 5 are based on assumed compound 
annual growth rates (CAGR). The CAGR applied across the 5-year period were 15.1% for the Offshore Energy 
CGU and 10% for the Marine Civils CGU. Gross margin assumptions applied range from the overall group 
margin for FY24 to a level in line with the margin reported for the Marine Civils segment.  The value in use 
calculation models an increase in revenue for both CGU’s of 2% into perpetuity after year 5.
The cashflow forecasts assume growth in revenue and a corresponding increase in gross margin levels 
across the Group to bring the overall group margin broadly in line with the margin reported for the Marine 
Civils segment. These growth rates are based on past experience and market conditions and discount rates 
are consistent with external information. The growth rates shown are the average applied to the cash flows 
of the individual cash generating units and do not form a basis for estimating the consolidated profits of the 
Group in the future.
In addition to growth in revenue and profitability, the key assumptions used in the impairment testing were as 
follows:
A post tax discount rate of 14.3 % WACC (FY23 15.5%) estimated using a weighted average cost of capital 
adjusted to reflect current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks specific to the Group
Terminal growth rate percentage of 2% (FY23: 2%)  
The discount rate used to test the cash generating units was the Group’s post-tax WACC of 14.3%.  The 
goodwill impairment review has been tested against a reduction in free cashflows. The Group considers free 
cashflows to be EBITDA less any required capital expenditure and tax. 
Marine Civils
The value in use calculations performed for the impairment review, together with sensitivity analysis using 
reasonable assumptions, indicate sufficient headroom for the goodwill carrying value in the Marine Civils 
CGU.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
11. GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLES 
Goodwill
Software
Product 
development
Trade 
name
Customer 
relationships
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
COST
As at 1 October 2022
26,292
294
3,503
1,289
1,870
33,248
Additions
-
-
311
-
-
311
As at 30 September 2023
26,292
294
3,814
1,289
1,870
33,559
Additions
150
-
85
-
-
235
Disposals
-
(272)
(845)
-
-
(1,117)
Discontinued operations
(234)
-
(880)
(738)
(445)
(2,297)
As at 30 September 2024
26,208
22
2,174
551
1,425
30,380
AMORTISATION AND IMPAIRMENT
As at 1 October 2022
4,109
155
2,134
455
1,831
8,684
Amortisation charge for the 
year
-
139
456
129
39
763
Impairment charge
4,745
-
-
-
-
4,745
As at 30 September 2023
8,854
294
2,590
584
1,870
14,192
Amortisation charge for the 
year
-
-
385
98
-
483
Eliminated on disposal
-
(272)
(844)
-
-
(1,116)
Impairment charge
1,546
-
-
-
-
1,546
Discontinued operations
-
-
(576)
(412)
(445)
(1,433)
As at 30 September 2024
10,400
22
1,555
270
1,425
13,672
NET BOOK VALUE
As at 30 September 2022
22,183
139
1,369
834
39
24,564
As at 30 September 2023
17,438
-
1,224
705
-
19,367
As at 30 September 2024
15,808
-
619
281
-
16,708
The remaining amortisation periods for software and product development are 6 months to 48 months 
(2023: 6 months to 48 months). 

Depreciation charges 
are allocated to 
administrative 
expenses in the 
income statement. 
The carrying value of 
the right of use asset 
relates to property 
leases (£1,127k), plant 
and equipment assets 
(£108k) and employee 
electric car scheme 
(£23k).
148
www.tekmargroup.com
149
www.tekmargroup.com
Offshore Energy
The value in use calculations performed for the impairment review were £1,546k lower than the carrying 
value of the Offshore Energy CGU. As a result, an impairment charge of £1,546k has been recognised in the 
P&L for the year ended 30 September 2024 against the goodwill apportioned to the Offshore Energy CGU. 
The value in use calculations have a range of assumptions, which if changed would lead to a change in the 
impairment charge recognised. To assess these changes management have run a model which sensitises 
the assumption on EBITDA generated in the offshore wind division.
In the base case model, management have assumed varying growth rates across the 5 year period, with an 
average CAGR across the period of 15.1%. If the CGU fell short of the revenue growth by 1% in each year and 
gross margin fell by 1% in each period of the model a further impairment of £4,707k would be recognised. If 
revenue is stable but gross margin fell by 1% in each period of the model a further impairment of £X2,042k 
would be recognised. 
The base case model assumes a post-tax discount rate of 14.3%. If the discount rate used were to increase 
by 1%, a further impairment of £1,923k would be recognised. 
All amortisation charges have been treated as an expense and charged to cost of sales and operating costs 
in the income statement.
12. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 
Freehold 
property  
Leasehold 
improvements
Plant and 
equipment
Fixtures and 
Fittings
Motor 
vehicles
Computer 
equipment
Right of 
use asset
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
COST
As at 1 October 2022
2,988
922
7,088
1,231
11
490
3,409
16,139
Additions
70
23
876
2
22
30
1,262
2,285
Disposals
-
-
(133)
(923)
-
(26)
(1,549)
(2,631)
Forex on consolidation
-
-
(3)
-
-
-
-
(3)
As at 30 September 2023
3,058
945
7,828
310
33
494
3,122
15,790
Additions
-
225
1,294
133
-
46
274
1,972
Disposals
-
(18)
(1,121)
(6)
(12)
(348)
(1,541)
(3,046)
Forex on consolidation
-
-
(12)
-
-
-
-
(12)
Lease modification
-
-
-
-
-
-
201
201
Discontinued operations
-
-
(9043)
-
(21)
-
(138)
(1,063)
Reclassify to Investment 
Property
(2,842)
-
-
-
-
-
-
(2,842)
As at 30 September 2024
216
1,152
7,085
437
-
192
1,918
11,000
DEPRECIATION
As at 1 October 2022
22
922
4,781
1,164
11
436
2,920
10,256
Charge for the year
54
1
715
41
-
32
484
1,327
Eliminated on disposal
-
-
(130)
(904)
-
(26)
(1,539)
(2,599)
Forex on consolidation
-
-
(2)
-
-
-
-
(2)
As at 30 September 2023
76
923
5,364
301
11
442
1,865
8,982
Charge for the year
27
2
8710
20
3
27
415
1,365
Eliminated on disposal
-
(18)
(1,031)
(6)
(12)
(344)
(1,542)
(2,95 
2)
Revaluations
(71)
-
-
-
-
-
-
(71)  
Forex on consolidation
-
-
(7)
-
-
-
-
(7)
Discontinued operations
(9)
-
(740)
-
(312)
-
(75)
(827)
As at 30 September 2024
23  
907
4,456
315
-
125
660
6,4856
NET BOOK VALUE
As at 30 September 2022
2,966
-
2,307
67
-
54
489
5,883
As at 30 September 2023
2,982
22
2,464
9
22
52
1,257
6,808
As at 30 September 2024
193
245
2,629
122
-
67
1,258
4,514
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
150
www.tekmargroup.com
151
www.tekmargroup.com
As at 30 September 2024, freehold property with a carrying value of £nil were subject to a fixed and floating 
charge that forms security for the bank borrowings disclosed in note 19 .
The following information relates to tangible fixed assets carried on the basis of revaluations in accordance 
with IAS 16 Property, plant and equipment.
Freehold Property
 30 Sep 
2024
 30 Sep 
2023
£000
£000
At fair value
30 September 2022
2,988
2,988
Aggregate depreciation thereon
(137)
(54)
Transfer to investment property
(2,851)
-
Net book value
-
2,934
Historical cost of revalued assets
2,656
2,656
Aggregate depreciation thereon
(530)
(499)
Discontinued operations
(2,126)
Historical cost net book value
-
2,157
13. INVESTMENT PROPERTY
Investment property includes commercial properties in England which are owned to earn rentals and for 
capital appreciation.
Changes to carrying amounts are as follows:
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep 
2023
£’000
£’000
Fair value 1 October
-
-
Transferred from freehold property
2,842
-
Change in fair value – revaluation
-
-
Fair value 30 September
2,842
-
The investment property is either leased to third parties on operating leases or are vacant. Rental income of 
£nil (2023: £nil) is shown within other operating income  . There are no expenses in relation to the investment 
property.  
Although the risks associated with rights the Group retained underlying assets are not considered to be 
significant, the Group employs strategies to further minimise these risks. The under guaranteed residual 
values do not represent significant risk for the Group, as they relate to property which is located in a location 
where market value, year on year, has always remained stable with trivial fluctuations. For example, ensuring 
the contract includes clauses requiring the lessee to compensate the Group when a property has been 
subjected to excess wear-and-tear during the lease term. The lessee does not have an option to purchase the 
property at the end of the lease expiry period.
The lease contract was initially signed for one year at zero rentals, with the option to extend at the end of the 
period in May 2025 at which time annual lease charges will be agreed.
The property was valued using by an independent valuer (G F White LLP) on 3rd January 2025  . The 
revaluation of investment property in the year resulted in no change in valuation during the period. 
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
152
www.tekmargroup.com
153
www.tekmargroup.com
14. INVESTMENTS
Subsidiary undertakings of the Group
Details of the investments in which the Group holds 20 per cent or more of the nominal value of any class of 
share capital are as follows:
Proportion held
Class of 
share capital 
held
By Parent 
Company
By the 
Group
Tekmar Limited
Ordinary
100%
100%
Tekmar Holdings Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Tekmar EBT Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Tekmar Energy Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Pipeshield International Limited
Ordinary
100%
100%
Pipeshield Company Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Pipeshield International Trading LLC
Ordinary
-
100%
Tekmar Polyurethanes Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Tekmar GmbH
Ordinary
-
100%
AgileTek Engineering Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Ryder Geotechnical Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
Tekmar Marine Technology Company Limited
Ordinary
-
100%
On 13th November 2023, the Group purchased a further 200 shares in Ryder Geotechnical limited 
representing the remaining 20 per cent of share capital for £200,000.  The Group now owns 100 per cent of 
the share capital of Ryder Geotechnical limited. There are no non-controlling interests. 
All the companies listed above are incorporated in England and Wales, and have a registered address of 
Grindon Way, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 6SH with the following exceptions:
Company
Country of 
Incorporation
Address
Pipeshield International Trading LLC
UAE
C2 Al Buttien Building, Office 642
Pipeshield Company Limited
Saudi Arabia
Dammam, KSA, Po Box 130 31952
Tekmar GmbH
Germany
Möllneyer Ufer 17, 45257 Essen, Germany
Tekmar Marine Technology 
Company Limited
China
Room 301,3F,No.1271 West Beijing Road, 
Jingan District, Shanghai, China
There are no restrictions on the Group’s ability to access or use the assets and settle the liabilities of the 
Group’s subsidiaries. The principal activities of these undertakings for the last relevant financial period were 
as follows:
Company
Principal activity
Tekmar Limited
Holding of shares in subsidiary companies and the 
management thereof
Tekmar Holdings Limited
Holding of shares in subsidiary companies and the 
management thereof
Tekmar EBT Limited
Corporate trustee for an employee benefit trust established 
to facilitate employee share ownership
Tekmar Energy Limited
Design and manufacture of subsea protection solutions for 
use in offshore subsea industry
Pipeshield International Limited
Design and manufacture of subsea asset protection
Pipeshield International Trading LLC
Design and manufacture of subsea asset protection
Pipeshield Company Limited
Design and manufacture of subsea asset protection
Tekmar Polyurethanes Limited
Dormant
Tekmar GmbH
Investment
AgileTek Engineering Limited
Engineering consulting for subsea environments
Ryder Geotechnical Limited
Geotechnical consulting for subsea environments
Tekmar Marine Technology Company 
Limited
Sales and project management for Asia Pacific region
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
154
www.tekmargroup.com
155
www.tekmargroup.com
On 2nd May 2024, the Group disposed of its 100% equity interest in its subsidiary, Subsea Innovation Limited. 
The subsidiary was classified as held for sale in the March 2024 interim results.   
The consideration was deferred but is expected to be fully received by May 2025  . £209k was received by 30 
September 2024, with a further £1.2m being received post year end.  
At the date of disposal, the carrying amount of Subsea Innovation’s net assets were as follows:
2 May 2024
£000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
235
Goodwill and other intangibles
863
1,098
Current assets
Inventory
168
Trade and other receivables
3,919
Cash and cash equivalents
59
4,146
Non-current liabilities
Other interest bearing loans and borrowings
(17)
Deferred tax liability
(62)
(79)
Current liabilities
Other interest bearing loans and borrowings
(44)
Trade and other payables
(2,041)
Provisions
(22)
(2,107)
Total net assets
3,058
Total consideration
1,688 
(Loss) on disposal  
(1,370) 
The loss on disposal is included in the loss for the year from discontinued operations in the 
consolidated statement of profit or loss. See note 28.
Consideration received:
£000
Cash received in the year
209
Deferred consideration
1,742
Less legal fees
(263)
Total consideration
1,688
15.	
INVENTORIES
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep 
2023
£000
£000
Raw materials
Work in Progress
1,027
83
1,489
28
Finished goods
769
610
1,879
2,127
All inventory items are carried at the lower of cost or net realisable value.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
156
www.tekmargroup.com
157
www.tekmargroup.com
16. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Amounts falling due within one year:
Trade receivables not past due
3,978
2,963
Trade receivables past due (1-30 days)
1,517
4,822
Trade receivables past due (over 30 days)
2,744
5,547
Trade receivables not yet due (retentions)
259
650
Expected credit loss
(520)
-
Trade receivables net
7,978
13,982
Contract assets
3,590
4,628
Other receivables
637
328
Warranty insurance debtor
5,165
-
Prepayments and accrued income
977
796
Deferred consideration on sale of subsidiary
1,742
-
Derivative asset
247
-
20,336
19,734
Trade and other receivables are all current   and any 
fair value difference is not material. Trade receivables 
are assessed by management for credit risk and 
are considered past due when a counterparty has 
failed to make a payment when that payment was 
contractually due. Management assesses trade 
receivables that are past the contracted due date by 
up to 30 days and by over 30 days.
The carrying amounts of the Group’s trade and other 
receivables are all denominated in GBP, USD, EUR and 
RMB. 
The Group assesses on a forward-looking basis the 
expected credit losses (ECL) associated with its 
financial assets. The Group has the following types 
of financial assets that are subject to the expected 
credit loss model:   
•	
Trade receivables arising from sale of goods and 
provision of consultancy services
•	
Contract assets relating to the sale of goods and 
provision of consultancy services
The Group recognizes a loss allowance for such 
losses at each reporting date. The measurement of 
ECL reflects:
1.	 An unbiased and probability-weighted amount 
that is determined by evaluating a range of 
possible outcomes.
2.	 The time value of money.
3.	 Reasonable and supportable information that 
is available without undue cost or effort at 
the reporting date about past events, current 
conditions, and forecasts of future economic 
conditions.
Methodology
The Group applies the simplified approach permitted 
by IFRS 9, which requires expected lifetime losses 
to be recognized from initial recognition of the 
receivables. The Group uses a provision matrix to 
calculate ECLs for trade receivables. The provision 
rates are based on days past due for Groupings of 
various customer segments that have similar loss 
patterns by geographical region and product type. 
The expected loss rates are based on the payment 
profiles of sales over a period of 5 years before 30 
September 2024.
To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables and contract assets have been Grouped based 
on shared credit risk characteristics and the days past due. The contract assets relate to unbilled work in 
progress and have substantially the same risk characteristics as the trade receivables for the same types 
of contract. The Group has therefore concluded that the expected loss rates for trade receivables are a 
reasonable approximation of the loss rates for the contract assets.
Key Assumptions
The key assumptions used in estimating ECL are as follows:
- Historical credit loss experience.
- Adjustments for forward-looking information such as economic forecasts and industry trends.
- The impact of macroeconomic factors on the creditworthiness of customers.
On that basis, the loss allowance as at 30 September 2024 and 30 September 2023 was determined as 
follows for both trade receivables and contract assets:
31 Sep 24 - £’000
Not yet 
due
< 3 Months 
past due
3m – 12m 
past due
> 12m past 
due
Expected loss rate
0%
0%
0%
23%
Carrying amount – Trade receivables
4,273
2,240
-
2,021 
Carrying amount – Contract assets
3,590
-
-
-
Loss Allowance
Nil
Nil
Nil
520
Historically the Group has recovered 100% of receivable balances and no credit losses have previously been 
accounted for. The Group continues to operate in global markets where payment practices surrounding large 
contracts can be different to those within Europe. The flow of funds on large capital projects within China 
tend to move only when the windfarm developer approves the completion of the project. 
The Group has a number of trade receivable balances, within its subsidiary based in China, which have 
been past due for more than 1 year. At 30th September 2024 the value of these overdue trade receivables 
was £2.0m, of a total outstanding trade receivable balance for the entity of £2.2m, These amounts remain 
outstanding at the approval of the financial statements. The Group made an expected credit loss provision 
in relation to the outstanding balances due to its Subsidiary within China. The provision is calculated on the 
weighted probabilities of the potential range of outcomes in relation to the outstanding balance.   
All other receivables are considered to be 100% recoverable on the basis that previous trading history sets a 
precedent that these balances will be received.  
Trade receivables and contract assets are written off where there is no reasonable expectation of recovery. 
Indicators that there is no reasonable expectation of recovery include, amongst others, the failure of a 
customer to engage in a repayment discussion with the Group. 
Impairment losses on trade receivables and contract assets are presented as net impairment losses within 
operating profit. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against the same line 
item.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
158
www.tekmargroup.com
159
www.tekmargroup.com
Reconciliation of Loss Allowance
The movement in the allowance for credit losses during the year was as follows:
£’000
30 Sep
2024
30 Sep
2023
Opening balance
-
-
Increase in loss allowance
520
-
Closing Balance
520
-
17.	
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 
 30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash at bank and in hand
4,630
5,219
Cash and cash equivalents were held in the following currencies:
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
UK Pound
410
2,746
Euro
13
142
US Dollar
4,042
1,892
Other
165
439
4,630
5,219
18. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Current
Trade payables
5,858
4,396 
Tax and social security
554
312
Accruals   
1,358
3,010
Contract liabilities
670
1,651 
Other creditors
63
-
Derivative financial liability
-
29
8,503
9,398
30 Sep
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Non-current
Deferred government grants
-
327 
-
327
Trade and other payables are all current and any fair value difference is not material. The derivative 
financial liability relates to forward foreign currency contracts. Forward currency contracts are 
revalued using the period end spot rate. 
The deferred government grant related to the building of innovation in house. This building was 
acquired by Tekmar Group Plc prior to the disposal of Subsea Innovation limited in May 2024. The 
remaining deferred grant was released by Subsea innovation limited on the sale of the building. 
Contract liabilities have reduced in the year mainly due to timing of ongoing projects, how far through 
the work we are versus what cash was received in advance.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
160
www.tekmargroup.com
161
www.tekmargroup.com
19. BORROWINGS
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep
2023
£000
£000
Current
Trade Loan Facility
Lease liability
3,183
371
3,575
471
CBILS Bank Loan
3,000
3,000
6,554
7,046
Non-current
Lease liability
924
834
924
834
 2024
 2023
£000
£000
Amount repayable
Within one year
In more than one year but less than two years
6,554
344
7,049
327
In more than two years but less than three years
351
290
In more than three years but less than four years
175
214
In more than four years but less than five years
54
-
7,478
7,880
The above carrying values of the borrowings equate to the fair values. 
 2024
2023
%
%
Average interest rates at the balance sheet date
Lease liability
5.92
5.60
Trade Loan Facility
7.19
7.50
CBILS Bank Loan
7.50
7.50
The CBILS Bank Loan was renewed in July 2024 and is due for maturity on 31 October 2025. The trade 
Loan Facility has been renewed in July 2024 and is due for Maturity on 31 July 2025, as described in 
note 2b.  
Lease liability
This represents the lease liability recognised under IFRS 16. The assets leased are shown as a right 
of use asset within Tangible Fixed Assets (note 12) and relate to the buildings from which the Group 
operates, along with leased items of equipment and computer software.
The asset and liability have been calculated using a discount rate between 3.25% and 7.25% based on 
the inception date of the lease.
These leases are due to expire between October 2024 and June 2029.
Cash flows from financing activities
An analysis of cash flows from financing activities is provided as follows:
Lease 
liabilities
£000
Loans & 
Borrowings
£000
Total
£000
Balance at 1 October 2022
402
6,990
7,392
Changes from financing cash flows
Proceeds from loans & borrowings
-
11,526
11,526
Payment of loans & borrowings
(11,941)
(11,941)
Payment of lease liabilities
(414)
-
(414)
Total changes from financing cash flows
(414)
(415)
(829)
Other changes
New leases
1,270
-
1,270
Interest expense
Payment of interest
47
-
505
(505)
552
(505)
Total other changes
1,317
-
1,317
Balance at 30 September 2023
1,305
6,575
7,880
Balance at 1 October 2023
1,305
6,575
7,880
Changes from financing cash flows
Proceeds from loans & borrowings
-
11,413
11,413
Repayment of Loans & Borrowings
-
(11,805)
(11,805) 
Payment of lease liabilities
(514)
-
(514)
Total changes from financing cash flows
(514)
(392)
(906)
Other changes
New leases
494
-
494
Interest expense
78
569
647
Payment of interest
Adjustments to lease calculation
Disposal r.e. discontinued operations
-
(8)
(60)
(569) 
-
-
(569)
(8)
(60  )
Total other changes
504
-
504
Balance at 30 September 2024
1,295
6,183
7,478
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
162
www.tekmargroup.com
163
www.tekmargroup.com
20. PROVISIONS & CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
Provisions are split between current and non-current. The carrying amounts and the movements in the 
provision account are as follows   :
Onerous 
contracts
£000
Warranty 
provision
£000
Total
£000
Carrying amount at 1 October 2022
-
-
-
Additional provision
465
-
465
Amounts utilised
-
-
-
Reversals
-
-
Carrying amount at 30 September 2023
465
-
465
Carrying amount at 1 October 2023
465
-
465
Additional provision
-
5,821
 5,821
Amounts utilised
(404)
-
(404)
Reversals
-
-
Carrying amount at 30 September 2024
61
5,821 
5,882
£5.2m of the warranty provision has been included as current liability as outflow of economic resources is 
expected within one year. The remaining provision (£0.7m) is expected to be paid in a period of greater than 
one year and therefore is included in non-current liabilities.
Onerous Contracts
The provision unwound in the year ending 30 September 2024 is for onerous contracts. The Group has 
assessed that the unavoidable costs of fulfilling the contract obligations exceed the economic benefits 
expected to be received from the contract. The provision relates to one contract in the offshore energy 
division (2023: two contracts) which are  expected to be completed in the year ending September 2025.
Warranty Provisions 
As noted by the Group in prior public announcements, there is a historic industry-wide issue regarding 
abrasion of legacy cable protection systems installed at off-shore windfarms. The precise cause of the 
issues in each instance is not always clear and could be as a result of a number of factors, such as the 
decision by windfarm developers to exclude a second layer of rock to stabilise the cables. 
Since the emergence of the issue, Tekmar has been committed to working with relevant installers and 
operators, including directly with customers who have highlighted this issue, to investigate further the root 
cause and assist with identifying potential remedial solutions. This has been undertaken without prejudice 
and on the basis that Tekmar has consistently denied any responsibility for these issues. Given the extensive 
uncertainties the, the RCA investigations have not concluded that the Tekmar products are defective.
Post the financial year end, the Group entered commercial settlement discussions with [2 customers] to 
resolve disputes related to the legacy defect notifications on  9   projects with alleged CPS failures. The 
aggregate of the expected outflows under the proposed settlement is £5.2m in full and final settlement of 
the 9 claims. The provision has been estimated based on the proposed settlement value.   In addition to 
the above a further provision of £0.7m has been made in respect of 1 legacy project with one of the above 
customers.
Working in collaboration with the relevant 2 customers, Tekmar have sought to explore insurance available 
for such matters not withstanding Tekmar’s position regarding responsibility and liability. In this regard, the 
Group have negotiated a commercial settlement with its EXPL insurance provider of £5.2m in relation to 
the above claims. The insurance proceeds are available for use at the discretion of the Group in settlement 
of the above claims, with any unused cash repayable to the insurer. The insurance receipt post year end is 
evidence that the insurance amount was virtually certain at year end, as such the Group have recognised 
the insurance income in the year ended 30 September 2024 with a corresponding insurance receivable 
recognised in the statement of financial position at 30 September 2024. 
Tekmar has received a further defect notification in relation to incorrect/out of specification coating 
application on 1 historic project. The nature of this defect notification is entirely separate to the legacy 
defect issues disclosed above.  There are a number of units which have been installed in relation to the 
this legacy project and discussions with the customer are ongoing in regards to the solution. Management 
believe that the most likely solution would result in an outflow of economic benefits of c£0.2m to provide a 
resolution to the issue.
The expected outflow of economic resources from the warranty matters has been recognised as an expense 
on the face of the statement of profit and loss for the year ended 30 September 2024. This value is shown 
net of the insurance receivable in accordance with IAS 37.
Tekmar Group plc has taken exemption under IAS37, Paragraph 92 to not disclose information on the 
uncertainties in relation to timing and the assumptions used to calculate the provision as this could 
prejudice seriously the position of the entity in a dispute with other parties on the subject matter as a result 
of the early stage of settlement discussions.  
CONTINGENT LIABILITIES  
Contingent liabilities are disclosed in the financial statements when a possible obligation exists, the 
existence will be confirmed by uncertain future events that are not wholly within the control of the entity. 
Contingent liabilities also include obligations that are not recognised because their amount cannot be 
measured reliably or because settlement is not probable.
As noted by the Group in prior public announcements, there is a historic industry-wide issue regarding 
abrasion of legacy cable protection systems installed at off-shore windfarms. The precise cause of the 
issues in each instance is not always clear and could be as a result of a number of factors, such as the 
decision by windfarm developers to exclude a second layer of rock to stabilise the cables. 
Tekmar is committed to working with relevant installers and operators, including directly with customers 
who have highlighted this issue, to investigate further the root cause in each case and assist with identifying 
potential remedial solutions. This is being done without prejudice and on the basis that Tekmar has 
consistently denied any responsibility for these issues. However, given these extensive uncertainties and 
level of variabilities at this early stage of investigations no conclusions can yet be made.
Tekmar have been presented with defect notifications for 2 legacy projects (in addition to those disclosed 
as provisions) on which it has supplied cable protection systems (“CPS”). These defect notifications have 
only been received on projects where there was an absence of the second layer of rock traditionally used to 
stabilise the cables.
At this stage management do not consider that there is a present obligation arising under IAS37 as 
insufficient evidence is available to identify the overall root cause of the damage to any of the CPS.  
Independent technical experts have been engaged to determine the root cause of the damage to the CPS, 
Tekmar have reviewed the assessments and concluded that a present obligation does not exists. 
Management acknowledges that there are many complexities with regards to the alleged defects which 
could lead to a range of possible outcomes. Given the range of possible outcomes, management considers 
that a possible obligation exists which will only be confirmed by further technical investigation to identify the 
root cause of alleged CPS failures. As such management has disclosed a contingent liability in the financial 
statements.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
164
www.tekmargroup.com
165
www.tekmargroup.com
Tekmar Group plc has taken exemption under IAS37, Paragraph 92 to not disclose information on the range 
of financial outcomes, uncertainties in relation to timing and any potential reimbursement as this could 
prejudice seriously the position of the entity in a dispute with other parties on the subject matter as a result 
of the early stage of discussions.
21. DEFERRED TAX
30 Sep 
2024
30 Sep 2023
Asset
Liability
Net
Asset
Liability
Net
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
At start of year
411
(914)
(503)
267
(580)
(313)
(Charge) / Credit to income statement
(69)
130
61
135
(336)
(201)
Credit on other comprehensive 
income
4
-
4
9
2
11
Discontinued operations
(14)
218
204
-
-
-
At end of year
332
(566)
(234)
411
(914)
(503)
The deferred tax liability relates to the 
following:
30 Sep
2024
30 Sep 2023
Asset
Liability
Net
Asset
Liability
Net
Accelerated capital allowances on 
property, plant & equipment
4
(548)
(544)
-
(603)
(603)
On share based payments
97
-
97
190
-
190
Other timing differences
231
(18)
213
221
(311)
(90)
332
(566)
(234)
411
(914)
(503)
Other timing difference relate to the deferred tax liability arising on the property revaluation.
In    addition to the deferred tax liability above, the Group has additional unrecognised gross tax losses 
of £22,747,000 (2023: £18,871,000), hence an unrecognised deferred tax asset of £5,686,827 (2023: 
£4,717,750).  These assets remain unrecognised as there is expected to be sufficient relief available in the 
businesses that hold the losses to mean it is unlikely that the losses will be used over the medium term and 
therefore the benefit derived from them is too uncertain to warrant recognition of an asset.
22. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
Financial risk management
The Group uses various financial instruments. These have historically included cash, forward foreign exchange 
contracts, issued equity instruments and various items, such as trade receivables and trade payables that 
arise directly from its operations. The main purpose of these financial instruments are to raise finance for the 
Group's operations.
The existence of these financial instruments exposes the Group to a number of financial risks, which are 
described in more detail below.
The main risks arising from the Group's financial instruments are market risk, cash flow interest rate risk, credit 
risk and liquidity risk. The Directors review and agree policies for managing each of these risks and they are 
summarised below.
Market risk
Market risk encompasses three types of risk, being currency risk, interest rate risk and price risk. In this 
instance price risk has been ignored as it is not considered a material risk to the business. The Group's policies 
for managing interest rate risk are set out in the subsection entitled "interest rate risk" below.
Currency risk
The Group contracts with certain customers in Euros, US dollars and Chinese Yuan. It manages this foreign 
currency risk through creating natural hedges on contracts by offsetting outflows in particular currencies 
against the inflow in that currency on particular contracts. Further to this, the Group uses forward foreign 
exchange contracts and foreign currency options which match the expected receipt of foreign currency income 
. At 30 September 2024 this covers the period up to March 2026 (As at 30 September 2023 the period to 
October 2024).
The table below shows the impact in GBP to the profit & loss account and net assets of the Group (excluding 
any changes in the fair value of derivatives) if there had been a 5% difference in the year end exchange rates:
At 30 September 2024
Eur
USD
QAR
AED
SAR
RMB
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
+5%
(95)
(302)
(2)
7
(36)
(115)
(542)
-5%
105
334
2
(8)
39
127
599
At 30 September 2023
Eur
USD
SAR
AED
SAR
RMB
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
+5%
(215)
(289)
21
5
1
(263)
(740)
-5%
163
319
(23)
(5)
291
(1)
744
Liquidity risk
The Group seeks to manage financial risk by ensuring sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs 
by closely managing the cash balance and by investing cash assets safely and profitably.
The Group policy throughout the period has been to ensure continuity of funding. Short-term flexibility is 
achieved by bank loan facilities.
The table below analyses the Group’s non-derivative and derivative financial liabilities into relevant maturity 
Groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date. Derivative 
financial liabilities are included in the analysis if their contractual maturities are essential for an understanding 
of the timing of cash flows. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
166
www.tekmargroup.com
167
www.tekmargroup.com
At 30 September 2024
Less than 1 
year
£000
Between 1 
and 2 years
£000
Between 2 
and 5 years
£000
Over 5 years
£000
Borrowings
6,183
-
-
-
Lease Obligations
371
344
580
-
Trade and other payables
7,216
-
-
-
At 30 September 2023
Less than 1 
year
£000
Between 1 
and 2 years
£000
Between 2 
and 5 years
£000
Over 5 years
£000
Borrowings
6,575
-
-
-
Lease Obligations
474
327
290
214
Trade and other payables
4,181
-
-
-
Interest rate risk
The Group finances its operations through a mixture of retained profits and bank borrowings. The Directors' 
policy to manage interest rate fluctuations is to regularly review the costs of capital and the risks associated 
with each class of capital, and to maintain an appropriate mix between fixed and floating rate borrowings.
Credit risk
The Group's principal financial assets are cash and trade receivables. The credit risk associated with cash is 
limited, as the counterparties have high credit ratings assigned by international credit-rating agencies. The 
principal credit risk arises therefore from the Group's trade receivables. The Group continuously monitors the 
credit quality of customers based on a credit rating scorecard. Where available, external credit ratings and/or 
reports on customers are obtained and used. The Group’s policy is to deal only with credit worthy counterparties. 
The credit terms range between 30 and 90 days. The credit terms for customers as negotiated with customers 
are subject to an internal approval process which considers the credit rating scorecard. The ongoing credit risk 
is managed through regular review of ageing analysis, together with credit limits per customer.
Trade receivables consist of a large number of customers in various industries and geographical areas. The 
Group does not hold any security on any trade receivables balance at each annual reporting date. 
In addition, the Group does not hold any collateral relating to other financial assets (eg derivative assets, cash 
and cash equivalents held with banks) at each annual reporting date.
The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified model of recognising lifetime expected credit losses for all trade 
receivables as these items do not have a significant financing component.
The Directors have assessed Group's trade receivables for the year ended 30 September 2024 and recorded an 
expected credit loss provision of £0.5m  . See note 3 for critical accounting estimates made regarding credit loss 
provisions and note 16 for further information on financial assets that are past due.
Summary of financial assets and liabilities by category
The carrying amount of financial assets and liabilities recognised at the balance sheet date of the reporting 
periods under review may also be categorised as follows:
2024
2023
 
£000
£000
Financial assets
Financial assets measured at amortised cost
Trade and other receivables
20,421
19,807
Cash and cash equivalents
4,630
5,219
Financial assets measured at FVTPL
Forward foreign exchange contracts
247
-
25,298
25,026
Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss
Forward foreign exchange contracts
-
(29)
Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
Non-current:
Borrowings
(924)
(834)
Current:
Borrowings
(6,554)
(7,046)
Trade payables
(5,858)
(4,859)
(13,336)
(12,768)
Net financial assets and liabilities
11,962
12,258
Financial instruments carried at fair value include forward foreign exchange contracts which are valued using 
Level 2 inputs in accordance with IFRS 13.
Capital risk management
The Group’s capital management objectives are:
•	
To ensure the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern; and
•	
To provide an adequate return to shareholders by pricing products and services commensurately with the 
level of risk.
This is achieved through close management of working capital and regular reviews of pricing. Decisions 
on whether to raise funding using debt or equity are made by the Board based on the requirements of the 
business. Capital for the reporting period under review is shown as total equity in the table above. 
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
168
www.tekmargroup.com
169
www.tekmargroup.com
23. SHARE CAPITAL 
Ordinary 
shares
 £0.01
Number
Ordinary 
Share Total 
£
At 30 September 2022
60,960,234
609,602
Issued during the period
75,112,392
751,124
At 30 September 2023
136,072,626
1,360,726
Issued during the period
1,197,353
11,974
At 30 September 2024
137,269,979
1,372,700
The new shares issued during the period arose from the exercise of share options (1,197,353 shares) (see 
Note 26). The nominal value of these shares £1,337.40 were not fully paid at year end, all other shares issued 
have been fully paid. These shares were issued for £0.01 per share.
4,111,548 shares were issued during 2023 relating to share-based payments (see Note 26 for details on the 
Group’s share-based employee remuneration programmes). These shares were issued for £0.09 per share.
The Group issued 71,000,844 shares on 19 April 2023, corresponding to 52% of total shares issued. Each 
share has the same right to receive dividends and the repayment of capital and represents one vote at 
shareholders’ meetings of Tekmar Group plc. These shares were issued for £0.09 per share
Proceeds received in addition to the nominal value of the shares issued in FY23 have been included in share 
premium, less registration and other regulatory fees and net of related tax benefits. The value of new shares 
charged to equity amounted to £nil (2023: £ 5,300,000). The costs associated with the issue of new shares 
amounted to £nil (2023: £1,141,593) and has been accounted for as a deduction to share premium.
24. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Directors consider there to be no ultimate controlling party following Admission in June 2018. 
SCF – IX, L.P hold 32.1% shareholding in Tekmar Group plc and are considered by the directors to be a person 
with significant control through ownership of more than 25% but not more than 50% of the ordinary share 
capital and voting rights.
Related party transactions with the Company are as follows: 
During the period, Tekmar Group plc procured entertainment events from Sport2Group Limited, a business 
which Alasdair Macdonald is a director. Costs relating to this purchase during the period were £24,000 (2023: 
£24,000). No amounts were due at the period end.
During the period Tekmar   Group plc procured consultancy services from Elan Solutions UK Ltd, a business 
which Richard Turner is a director. Costs relating to this purchase during the period were £11,000 (2023: £nil). 
£11,000 was payable to Elan Solutions Limited at the period end (2023: £nil).
During the period Tekmar Group plc procured consultancy services from Craigshannoch Limited, a business 
which Colin Welsh is a director. Costs relating to this purchase during the period were £11,000 (2023: £nil). 
£1,000 was payable to Craigshannoch Limited at the period end (2023: £nil).
Key management compensation is given in note 5 (b), this includes remuneration to S Lockard and C Welsh 
who are partners of SCF – IX LP.
25. SHARE BASED PAYMENTS
During the year the Group operated four equity-settled share-based payment plans (2023: four) as described 
below.
The Tekmar Group plc Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)
The LTIP is a discretionary executive share plan under which the Board may, within certain limits and subject 
to any applicable performance conditions, grant to eligible employees nil or nominal cost options, options 
with a market value exercise price, conditional or restricted awards. All employees are eligible for selection 
to participate in the plan.
The Tekmar Group plc Retention Plan (“Retention”)
The retention is a discretionary executive share plan under which the Board may, within certain limits and 
subject to any applicable service conditions, grant to eligible employees nil or nominal cost options, options 
with a market value exercise price, conditional or restricted awards. All employees are eligible for selection 
to participate in the plan. 
The Tekmar Group plc Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”)
The SIP is an all-employee ownership plan under which eligible employees may be awarded free and/or 
matching shares. The SIP operates through a UK-resident trust (the “SIP Trust”). On 13 September 2018 the 
Company issued 42,691 shares of £0.01 each in the Company. The shares will be held in trust for a minimum 
holding period of 3 years and there is a forfeiture period of 3 years during which employees who participated 
in the SIP will lose their Award if they resign or are dismissed from their employment.
On 15 September 2021 the Company issued 241,376 shares of £0.01 each in the Company. The shares will 
be held in trust for a minimum holding period of 3 years and there is a forfeiture period of 3 years during 
which employees who participated in the SIP will lose their Award if they resign or are dismissed from their 
employment.
The Tekmar Group plc Save as you earn Plan (“SAYE”)
The SAYE is an all-employee ownership plan under which eligible employees are invited to subscribe for 
options over the Company’s shares which may be granted at a discount of up to 20%. On 31 March 2021 the 
Company launched the a further SAYE plan (SAYE 2021) and options over 190,252 shares were granted to 52 
staff.  There is a forfeiture period of 3 years during which employees who participated in the SAYE will lose 
their award if they resign or are dismissed from their employment. On 31 March 2022 the Company launched 
the a further SAYE plan (SAYE 2022) and options over 550,393 shares were granted to 21 staff.  On 31 March 
2023 the Company launched  a further SAYE plan (SAYE 2023) and options over 3,306,238 shares were 
granted to 43 staff. There is a forfeiture period of 3 years during which employees who participated in the 
SAYE will lose their award if they resign or are dismissed from their employment.
The Tekmar Group plc Management shares awarded
In 2013 Tekmar Group plc awarded 4,075,788 shares to senior management team members in settlement of 
annual bonuses. These share awards have been accounted for as share based payments under IFRS2.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
170
www.tekmargroup.com
171
www.tekmargroup.com
A summary of the options granted is shown in the table below:
Plan
1 October 
2023
Granted in 
the period
Exercised 
in the 
period
Lapsed in 
the period
30 
September 
2024 share 
options 
outstanding
Vesting 
period
Exercise 
period
SIP
28,589
-
-
(11,451)
17,138
3 years
10 years
SAYE
3,445,474
1,045,472
-
(2,356,552)
2,134,394
3 years
10 years
Retention
17,073
-
(17,073)
-
-
3 years
10 years
LTIP
4,666,402
-
(1,180,280)
(1,672,942)
1,813,180
3 years
10 years
Plan
1 October 
2022
Granted in 
the period
Exercised 
in the 
period
Lapsed in 
the period
30 
September 
2023 share 
options 
outstanding
Vesting 
period
Exercise 
period
SIP
53,589
-
-
(25,000)
28,589
3 years
10 years
SAYE
481,410
3,306,238
-
(342,174)
3,445,474
3 years
10 years
Retention
27,833
-
(10,760)
-
17,073
3 years
10 years
LTIP
-
5,257,165
-
(590,763)
4,666,402
3 years
10 years
Management
Award
-
4,075,788
(4,075,788)
-
-
Nil
Nil
The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year was 
£0.10 (2023: £0.09). 
The schemes had a weighted average remaining contractual life as follows:
Plan
2024
2023
SIP
6 Years
6 Years
SAYE
8 Years
8 Years
Retention
8 Years
8 Years
LTIP
8 Years
8 Years
The Group has recognised a total expense of £191,000    (2022: £658,427) in respect of equity-settled 
share-based payment transactions in the period ended 30 September 2024. The share-based payment 
transactions for the IPO options, management award options have been treated as an adjusted Item in the 
profit and loss account when calculating Adjusted EBITDA. These transactions account for a £160,000 (2023: 
£508,000) in the year to 30 September 2024. The remaining share based payment transactions are treated as 
administrative expenses £31,000 (2023: £151,000).
Valuation model inputs
The key inputs to the Black-Scholes-Merton and Monte Carlo simulation models for the purposes of 
estimating the fair values of the share options granted in the year are as follows:
Plan
SIP
SAYE20
SAYE21
SAYE22
SAYE23
SAYE24
Retention
LTIP
Grant date
13/09/18
31/03/20
31/03/21
31/3/22
31/03/23
31/03/24
22/08/20
20/04/23
Share price 
at grant date 
(P)
161.5
83
63.75
37.50
8.5
9.25
108
10.5
Expiry date
13/09/28
31/03/30
31/03/31
31/03/32
31/03/33
31/03/34
22/08/30
19/04/26
Exercise 
price (P)
1.00
78.00
50.20
30.0
6.80
7.40
1.00
1.00
Expected 
volatility (%)
44.02
45.02
78.95
45.67
165.50
51.13
53.85
165.71
Risk-free 
rate (%)
2.0 %
2.0 %
2.0 %
2.0%
2.0%
2.0%
2.0 %
2.0 %
Expectation 
of meeting 
performance 
criteria
80%
100%
85%
75%
72%
61%
100%
85%
Notes to the Group financial statements continued

www.tekmargroup.com
172
www.tekmargroup.com
173
www.tekmargroup.com
26. DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS 
On 2nd May 2024, Subsea Innovation Limited was sold for £1,951,000 with payments due in instalments up 
until May 2025 resulting in a loss of £547,000.
Operating profit of Subsea Innovation Limited until the date of disposal, and the profit and loss from 
remeasurement and disposal of assets and liabilities classified as held for sale are summarised as follows:
30 Sep 24
30 Sep 23
 
£000
£000
Revenue
3,792
4,275
Cost of sales
(2,937)
(3,289)
Employee benefits expense
(763)
(1,911)
Depreciation and amortisation
(197)
(223)
Other expenses
(311)
(224)
Other income
327
8
Operating profit
(89)
(1,364)
Net finance income/(costs)
3
(10)
Loss from discontinued operations before tax
(86)
(1,374)
Tax expense
140
-
Profit/(loss) for the period / year
54
(1,374)
Loss on measurement and disposal
Loss before tax on disposal (note 14)
(1,370)
-
Total loss on remeasurement and disposal
(1,370)
-
Loss for the year from discontinued operations
(1,316)
(1,374)
Cash flows generated by Subsea Innovation Limited for the reporting periods under review until its disposal 
were as follows:
30 Sep 24
30 Sep 23
 
£000
£000
Operating activities
48
(1,180)
Investing activities
(3)
(186)
Financing activities
(178)
1,538
Total cash flows
(133)
172
28. POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 
After the reporting period, the Group received insurance proceeds of £5.2m in relation to legacy warranty 
matters. Further details can be found in note 20 of the annual report. There were no other subsequent events.
Notes to the Group financial statements continued
Parent Company Balance Sheet
Note
 30 September 
2024
30 September 
2023
£000
£000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
4
29
35
Investments
3
24,797
26,804
Investment property
5
2,842
-
Deferred tax assets
57
112
Trade and other receivables
6
15,964
15,869
Total non-current assets
43,689
42,820
Current assets
Trade and other receivables
6
6,348
9,481
Cash at bank and in hand
185
1,425
Total current assets
6,533
10,906
Total assets
50,222
53,726
Equity and liabilities
Share capital
1,373
1,361
Share premium
72,201
72,201
Merger relief reserve
744
1,738
Retained earnings
(33,018)
(29,295)
Total equity
41,300 
46,005
Current liabilities
Other loans and borrowings
7
6,195
6,586
Trade and other payables
8
2,716
1,112
Total current liabilities
8,911
7,698
Non-current liabilities
Other loans and borrowings
7
11
23
Total non-current liabilities
11
23
Total equity and liabilities
50,222
53,726
Parent Company profit and loss account
The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies 
Act 2006. The Company’s loss after taxation for the period was £4.9m (2023: £8.5m)
The Parent Company financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 3 March 2025 and were 
signed on its behalf by:
Leanne Wilkinson
Chief Financial Officer
Company registered number: 11383143

www.tekmargroup.com
174
www.tekmargroup.com
175
www.tekmargroup.com
Parent company statement of 
changes in equity
Share
capital
Share
premium
Merger 
relief
reserve
Retained
earnings
Total
equity
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Balance at 1 October 2022
609
67,652
1,738
(21,275)
48,724
Loss for the year
-
-
-
(8,537)
(8,537)
Total comprehensive expense for the 
year
-
-
-
(8,537)
(8,537)
Share based payments 
-
-
-
517
517
 Issue of shares 
752
4,549
-
-
5,301
Total transactions with owners, 
recognised directly in equity
752
4,549
-
517
5,818
Balance at 30 September 2023
1,361
72,201
1,738
(29,295)
46,005
Loss for the period
-
-
-
(4,880)
(4,880)
Total comprehensive expense for the 
period
-
-
-
(4,880)
(4,880)
Share based payments
-
-
-
163
163
 Issue of shares 
12
-
-
-
12
Total transactions with owners, 
recognised directly in equity
12
-
-
163
175
Transfer following sale of subsidiary
-
-
(994)
994
-
Balance at 30 September 2024
1,373
72,201
744
(33,018)
41,300
Notes to the parent company financial statements
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The company has consistently applied the following accounting policies to all periods presented in these 
financial statements. 
(a) Basis of preparation
Tekmar Group plc (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in England and 
Wales. The registered office of the Company is Grindon Way, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 6SH. 
The registered company number is 11383143. 
The principal activity of the Company and its subsidiaries (together the “Group”) is that of design, manufacture 
and supply of subsea cable, umbilical and flexible protection systems operating across the Offshore Wind, Oil & 
Gas and other energy sectors, including associated subsea engineering services.
(b0 Reporting framework
The separate financial statements of the Company have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (“FRS 101”), on the going concern basis under the historical 
cost convention, and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and applicable Accounting Standards in the 
UK. The principal accounting policies are set out below.
The following exemptions from the requirements in IFRS have been applied in the preparation of these financial 
statements, in accordance with FRS 101:
•	
The following paragraphs of IAS 1 “Presentation of Financial Statements”
•	
10(d) (statement of cash flows);
•	
16 (statement of compliance with all IFRS);
•	
111 (cash flow statement information); and
•	
134-136 (capital management disclosures)
•	
IFRS 7 “Financial Instruments : Disclosures”;
•	
IAS 7 “Statement of Cash Flows”;
•	
IAS 24 (paragraphs 17 and 18a) “Related Party Disclosures” (key management compensation); and
•	
IAS 24 “Related Party Disclosures” – the requirement to disclose related party transactions between two or 
more members of a Group.
•	
IAS 8.30 – the requirement to disclose accounting standards issued but not effective
As the Group financial statements include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has taken the exemptions 
available under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures;
IFRS 2 “Share-based Payments” in respect of Group settled equity share-based payments; and
Certain disclosures required by IFRS 13 “Fair Value Measurement” and disclosures required by IFRS 7 “Financial 
Instruments : Disclosures”
(c) Parent Company profit and loss account
The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies 
Act 2006. The Company’s loss after taxation for the period was £5.129m (2023: £8.537m)

www.tekmargroup.com
176
www.tekmargroup.com
177
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the parent company financial statements continued
(d) Dividend distribution
The distribution of a dividend to the Company’s 
shareholders is recognised as a liability in the 
Company’s financial statements in the year in which it 
is approved by the Company’s shareholders.
(e) Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Investments in Group undertakings are stated at cost, 
unless their value has been impaired in which case 
they are valued at their recoverable amount.
(f) Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost 
less accumulated depreciation and any recognised 
impairment loss. 
Leased assets are accounted for as a “right-of-use” 
asset under IFRS 16 Leases.  The initial value of a 
right-of-use asset is determined by the value of the 
lease liability.
Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to profit or loss over the 
estimated useful lives of each part of an item of 
property, plant and equipment. Depreciation is 
provided on the following basis:
Motor vehicles
4 years reducing balance 
or straight line
It has been assumed that all assets will be used until 
the end of their economic life.
(g) Investment property
Investment properties are properties held to earn 
rentals or for capital appreciation, or both, and are 
accounted for using the fair value model.
Investment properties are revalued annually with 
resulting gains and losses recognised in profit or loss. 
These are included in the consolidated statement of 
financial position and their fair values. See note 13.
(h) Deferred taxation
Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences 
between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used 
for taxation purposes. 
The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the 
expected manner of realisation or settlement of the 
carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax 
rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date.
A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent 
that it is probable that future taxable profits will be 
available against which the asset can be utilised.
(i) Share-based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share-based 
remuneration plans for certain employees. None of the 
Group’s plans are cash-settled. All goods and services 
received in exchange for the grant of any share-based 
payment are measured at their fair values.
Where employees are rewarded using share-based 
payments, the fair value of employees' services is 
determined indirectly by reference to the fair value 
of the equity instruments granted. This fair value is 
appraised at the grant date and excludes the impact of 
non-market vesting conditions.
All share-based remuneration is ultimately recognised 
as an expense in profit or loss with a corresponding 
credit to retained earnings. If vesting years or other 
vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over 
the vesting year, based on the best available estimate 
of the number of share options expected to vest.
The fair value determined at the grant date of equity-
settled share-based payments issued to employees of 
subsidiary undertakings is recognised as an addition 
to the cost of investment in subsidiary undertakings 
on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, 
based on the Company’s estimate of shares that will 
eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non-
market-based vesting conditions.
Employer social security contributions payable 
in connection with the grant of share awards are 
considered an integral part of the grant itself and the 
charge is treated as a cash-settled transaction.
(j) Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental 
costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares 
are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from 
the proceeds of issue.
(k) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances 
and call deposits with an original maturity of three 
months or less. 
(l) Financial assets 
Classification
The Company classifies its financial assets as 
loans and receivables. Management determines 
the classification of its financial assets at initial 
recognition.
Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial 
assets with fixed or determinable payments that 
arise principally through the provision of services 
to customers. They are initially recognised at the 
transaction price and are subsequently stated at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
They are included in current assets, except for 
maturities greater than 12 months after the end of 
the reporting year. Loans and receivables comprise 
mainly trade and other receivables, including 
amounts owed by related entities.
Impairment of financial assets 
A loss allowance for expected credit losses on 
trade and other receivables and contract assets 
is measured at an amount equal to the lifetime 
expected credit losses. Lifetime expected credit 
losses are the expected credit losses that will result 
from all possible default events over the expected 
life of a financial instrument. This assessment is 
performed on a collective basis considering forward-
looking information. The Group considers a financial 
asset to be in default when the receivable is unlikely 
to pay its credit obligations to the Group in full 
without recourse by the Group to actions such as 
realising security (if any is held)
(m) Financial liabilities 
The Company initially recognises its financial 
liabilities at fair value net of transaction costs where 
applicable and subsequently they are measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
Financial liabilities comprise trade and other 
payables, amounts owed to Group undertakings, 
other liabilities and accruals and are initially 
recognised at fair value, unless the arrangement 
constitutes a financing transaction, where the debt 
instrument is measured at the present value of the 
future payments discounted at a market rate of 
interest.
Trade and other payables are obligations to pay 
for goods or services that have been acquired in 
the ordinary course of business from suppliers. 
Trade payables are classified as current liabilities 
if payment is due within one year or less. If not, 
they are presented as non-current liabilities. Other 
liabilities include payments in advance from 
customers.
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, 
net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings 
are subsequently carried at amortised cost; any 
difference between the proceeds (net of transaction 
costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the 
income statement over the year of the borrowings 
using the effective interest method.
(n) Critical accounting estimates
The preparation of the Parent Company financial 
statements requires the Directors to make estimates 
and assumptions that affect the reported amounts 
of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of 
liabilities. Estimates and judgements are continually 
evaluated and are based on historical experience 
and other factors including expectations of future 
events that are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. Actual results may differ from these 
estimates. 
The Directors consider that the following estimates 
and judgements are likely to have the most 
significant effect on the amounts recognised in the 
Group financial statements. 

www.tekmargroup.com
178
www.tekmargroup.com
179
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the parent company financial statements continued
(a) Critical accounting estimates
Impairment of investments
The carrying amount of the Company’s investments in subsidiaries £24,797,000 as at 30 September 2024 
(2023: £26,804,000). The Directors have carried out an impairment review in accordance with the accounting 
policies. The forecast cash generation for each investment and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital 
(“WACC”) represent significant assumptions. 
The cash flows are based on a five-year forecast with a compound average growth rate over the 5 year period 
of 15.1%. Subsequent years are based on a reduced growth rate of 2.0% into perpetuity. 
The discount rate used was the Group’s pre-tax WACC of 14.3%.
The value in use calculations performed for the impairment review, together with sensitivity analysis using 
reasonable assumptions, indicate sufficient headroom for the investments in subsidiaries and therefore do 
not give rise to impairment concerns.
2. REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS
Details of Directors’ remuneration are shown in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 142 of the Group 
financial statements. Details of auditor remuneration are shown in note 8 of the Group financial statements.
The average number of persons employed by the Company (including directors) during the period, analysed 
by category, was as follows:
2024
2023
 
No
No
Directors
7
6
Administration
14
13
 
21
19
Staff costs for the Company during the period were: 
12M ending 
30 Sep 2024 
12M ending
30 Sep 2023 
 
£000
£000
Wages and salaries
1,834
1,447
Social security costs
242
197
Defined contribution pension cost
80
55
Share based payments (note 25)
117
486
 
2,273
2,186
3. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 
2023
£000
£000
Investment in subsidiaries at 01 October 2023
26,804
32,325
Impairment of investment
-
(5,673)
Additions (Capital contribution in relation to share based payments)
59
152
Disposal of subsidiary
(2,066)
-
Investment in subsidiaries at 30 September 2024
24,797
26,804
The carrying amount of the Company’s investments in subsidiaries £24,797,000 as at 30 September 2024 
(2023: £26,804,000). The Directors have carried out an impairment review in accordance with the accounting 
policies. The forecast cash generation for each investment and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital 
(“WACC”) represent significant assumptions. 
The investments in the Groups subsidiaries have been reviewed for impairment on an individual basis by 
assessing the value in use of the subsidiary. The value in use has been calculated using budgeted cash flow 
projections for the next 5 years. The forecasts have been compiled at individual entity level with the first year 
modelled around the known contracts which the entities have already secured or are in an advanced stage of 
securing. A targeted revenue stream based on historic revenue run rates has then been incorporated into the 
cashflows to model contracts that are as yet unidentified that are likely be won and completed in the year. The 
forecasts for years 2 to 5 are based on assumed compound annual growth rates (CAGR). The CAGR applied 
across the 5-year period were 15.1% for the Tekmar Limited and 10% for Pipeshield International Limited. This 
CAGR is in line with expected market rate.  The value in use calculation models an increase in revenue for 
both CGU’s of 2% into perpetuity after year 5.
The discount rate used was the Group’s pre-tax WACC of 14.3%.
The value in use calculations performed for the impairment review, together with sensitivity analysis using 
reasonable assumptions, indicate sufficient headroom for the investments in subsidiaries and therefore do 
not give rise to impairment concerns.

www.tekmargroup.com
180
www.tekmargroup.com
181
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the parent company financial statements continued
The Company directly owns the whole of the issued ordinary shares of the following subsidiary undertakings:
Class of 
share 
capital held
By Parent 
Company
Carrying 
Value FY24 
Carrying 
Value FY23
Tekmar Limited
Ordinary
100%
17,494
17,430
Subsea Innovation Limited
Ordinary
0%
-
2,124
Pipeshield International Limited
Ordinary
100%
7,256
7,250
Total 
24,750
26,804
All the companies listed above are incorporated in England and Wales and have a registered address of 
Grindon Way, Aycliffe Business Park, Newton Aycliffe, DL5 6SH.
There are no restrictions on the Group’s ability to access or use the assets and settle the liabilities of the 
Group’s subsidiaries. The principal activities of these undertakings for the last relevant financial period were 
as follows:
Company
Principal activity
Tekmar Limited
Holding of shares in subsidiary companies and the management thereof
Subsea Innovation Limited
Design and manufacture of equipment for the offshore subsea industry
Pipeshield International 
Limited
Design and manufacture of subsea asset protection
4. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 
Motor 
Vehicles
Total
£000
£000
COST
As at 1 October 2022
46
46
Additions
-
-
As at 30 September 2023
46
46
Additions
-
-
As at 30 September 2024
46
46
DEPRECIATION
As at 1 October 2022
-
-
Charge for the year
11
11
As at 30 September 2023
11
11
Charge for the period
6
6
As at 30 September 2024
17
17
NET BOOK VALUE
As at 30 September 2022
46
46
As at 30 September 2023
35
35
As at 30 September 2024
29
29

www.tekmargroup.com
182
www.tekmargroup.com
183
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the parent company financial statements continued
5. INVESTMENT PROPERTY 
Investment property includes commercial properties in England which are owned to earn rentals and for 
capital appreciation.
Changes to carrying amounts are as follows:
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
£’000
£’000
Carrying amount 1 October
-
-
Additions
2,842
-
Change in fair value – revaluation
-
-
Carrying amount 30 September
2,842
-
The investment property is either leased to third parties on operating leases or are vacant. Rental income of 
£nil (2023: £nil) is shown within other operating income all at a fixed rate. There are no expenses in relation to 
the investment property.
Although the risks associated with rights the Group retained underlying assets are not considered to be 
significant, the Group employs strategies to further minimise these risks. The under guaranteed residual 
values do not represent significant risk for the Group, as they relate to property which is located in a location 
where market value, year on year, has always remained stable with trivial fluctuations. For example, ensuring 
the contract includes clauses requiring the lessee to compensate the Group when a property has been 
subjected to excess wear-and-tear during the lease term. The lessee does not have an option to purchase the 
property at the end of the lease expiry period.
The lease contract was initially signed for one year at zero rentals, with the option to extend at the end of the 
period in May 2025 at which time annual lease charges will be agreed.
6. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
£000
£000
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – non-current
15,964
15,869
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – current
4,234
9,410 
Prepayments and accrued income – current
372
71
Deferred consideration
1,742
-
Total - Current
6,348
9,481
22,312
25,350
All of the amounts owed by Group undertakings shown above are repayable on demand and attract interest 
at rates between 0% and 3%. No expected credit losses are recognised on intercompany receivables as 
historically no balances have been defaulted on.
7. BORROWINGS
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
£000
£000
Current
Trade Loan Facility
3,183
3,575
Finance lease
12
11
CBILS Loan Facility
3,000
3,000
6,195
6,586
Non-current
Finance lease
11
23
11
23
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
£000
£000
Amount repayable
Within one year
In more than one year but less than two years
6,195
11
6,586
23
6,206
6,609
The above carrying values of the borrowings equate to the fair values. The trade loan facility is provided at 
interest rate of 2% over base rate pa and is available to the Company until 31 July 2025. The CBILS loan facility is 
provided at interest rate of 2% over base rate pa and is available to the Company until 31 October 2025.
Finance leases related to electric vehicles purchased as part of an employee benefit scheme. These have been 
discounted at a rate of 3.25%.
8. PAYABLES: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR
30 Sep 2024
30 Sep 2023
£000
£000
Trade payables
235
243
Amounts due to Group undertakings
1,623
393
Other taxation and social security
275
99
Accruals and deferred income
583
377
2,716
1,112
9. SHARE CAPITAL 
Details of movements in shares are set out in note 24 to the Group financial statements.
10. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption included in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ not to 
disclose details of transactions with Group undertakings, on the grounds that it is the parent company of a 
Group whose accounts are publicly available.
Directors’ transactions
Details of the Directors’ interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company are provided in the Directors’ 
Report. 

www.tekmargroup.com
184
www.tekmargroup.com
185
www.tekmargroup.com
Notes to the parent company financial statements continued
11. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The Company operates a number of share option arrangements for key executives and employees, 
further details of which can be found in note 26 to the Group financial statements. Further details of the 
arrangements for senior executives can be found in the Directors' Remuneration Report in the Group financial 
statements.
The Company recognised total expense of £118,000 in respect of the equity-settled share-based payment 
transactions in the period ended 30 September 2024 (2023: £486,036).
Notes:

www.tekmargroup.com
186
www.tekmargroup.com
187
www.tekmargroup.com

www.tekmargroup.com
Annual Report 2024
Enabling the world’s 
energy transition